Part Number Hot Search : 
FR256 CM200 FR256 MS470 1E106 LT1931A 030000 LT1016
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download S3P825 Datasheet File
  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
　
 

  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 S3C825A/P825A
8-BIT CMOS MICROCONTROLLERS USER'S MANUAL
Revision 1
Important Notice
The information in this publication has been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely accurate at the time of publication. Samsung assumes no responsibility, however, for possible errors or omissions, or for any consequences resulting from the use of the information contained herein. Samsung reserves the right to make changes in its products or product specifications with the intent to improve function or design at any time and without notice and is not required to update this documentation to reflect such changes. This publication does not convey to a purchaser of semiconductor devices described herein any license under the patent rights of Samsung or others. Samsung makes no warranty, representation, or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does Samsung assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit and specifically disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation any consequential or incidental damages. S3C825A/P825A 8-Bit CMOS Microcontrollers User's Manual, Revision 1 Publication Number: 21-S3-C825A/P825A-032002 (c) 2002 Samsung Electronics All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electric or mechanical, by photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Samsung Electronics. Samsung Electronics' microcontroller business has been awarded full ISO-14001 certification (BSI Certificate No. FM24653). All semiconductor products are designed and manufactured in accordance with the highest quality standards and objectives. Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. San #24 Nongseo-Ri, Giheung-Eup Yongin-City, Gyeonggi-Do, Korea C.P.O. Box #37, Suwon 440-900 TEL: (82)-(31)-209-1934 FAX: (82)-(31)-209-1899 Home Page: http://www.samsungsemi.com Printed in the Republic of Korea "Typical" parameters can and do vary in different applications. All operating parameters, including "Typicals" must be validated for each customer application by the customer's technical experts. Samsung products are not designed, intended, or authorized for use as components in systems intended for surgical implant into the body, for other applications intended to support or sustain life, or for any other application in which the failure of the Samsung product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur. Should the Buyer purchase or use a Samsung product for any such unintended or unauthorized application, the Buyer shall indemnify and hold Samsung and its officers, employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and distributors harmless against all claims, costs, damages, expenses, and reasonable attorney fees arising out of, either directly or indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death that may be associated with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Samsung was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of said product.
Preface
The S3C825A/P825A Microcontroller User's Manual is designed for application designers and programmers who are using the S3C825A/P825A microcontroller for application development. It is organized in two main parts: Part I Programming Model Part II Hardware Descriptions
Part I contains software-related information to familiarize you with the microcontroller's architecture, programming model, instruction set, and interrupt structure. It has six chapters: Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Product Overview Address Spaces Addressing Modes Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Control Registers Interrupt Structure Instruction Set
Chapter 1, "Product Overview," is a high-level introduction to S3C825A/P825A with general product descriptions, as well as detailed information about individual pin characteristics and pin circuit types. Chapter 2, "Address Spaces," describes program and data memory spaces, the internal register file, and register addressing. Chapter 2 also describes working register addressing, as well as system stack and user-defined stack operations. Chapter 3, "Addressing Modes," contains detailed descriptions of the addressing modes that are supported by the S3C8-series CPU. Chapter 4, "Control Registers," contains overview tables for all mapped system and peripheral control register values, as well as detailed one-page descriptions in a standardized format. You can use these easy-to-read, alphabetically organized, register descriptions as a quick-reference source when writing programs. Chapter 5, "Interrupt Structure," describes the S3C825A/P825A interrupt structure in detail and further prepares you for additional information presented in the individual hardware module descriptions in Part II. Chapter 6, "Instruction Set," describes the features and conventions of the instruction set used for all S3C8-series microcontrollers. Several summary tables are presented for orientation and reference. Detailed descriptions of each instruction are presented in a standard format. Each instruction description includes one or more practical examples of how to use the instruction when writing an application program. A basic familiarity with the information in Part I will help you to understand the hardware module descriptions in Part II. If you are not yet familiar with the S3C8-series microcontroller family and are reading this manual for the first time, we recommend that you first read Chapters 1-3 carefully. Then, briefly look over the detailed information in Chapters 4, 5, and 6. Later, you can reference the information in Part I as necessary. Part II "hardware Descriptions," has detailed information about specific hardware components of the S3C825A/P825A microcontroller. Also included in Part II are electrical, mechanical, OTP, and development tools data. It has 15 chapters: Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Clock Circuit RESET and Power-Down I/O Ports Basic Timer and Timer 0 Timer 1 8-bit Timer 2 16-bit Timer 3 Watch Timer Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 Chapter 21 Chapter 22 LCD Controller/Driver 10-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter Serial I/O Interface UART Electrical Data Mechanical Data S3P825A OTP Development Tools
Two order forms are included at the back of this manual to facilitate customer order for S3C825A/P825A microcontrollers: the Mask ROM Order Form, and the Mask Option Selection Form. You can photocopy these forms, fill them out, and then forward them to your local Samsung Sales Representative.
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
iii
Table of Contents
Part I -- Programming Model
Chapter 1 Product Overview
S3C8-Series Microcontrollers...................................................................................................................1-1 S3C825A Microcontroller .........................................................................................................................1-1 OTP.........................................................................................................................................................1-1 Features ..................................................................................................................................................1-2 Block Diagram .........................................................................................................................................1-3 Pin Assignment........................................................................................................................................1-4 Pin Descriptions.......................................................................................................................................1-6 Pin Circuits ..............................................................................................................................................1-8
Chapter 2
Address Spaces
Overview .................................................................................................................................................2-1 Program Memory (ROM) .........................................................................................................................2-2 Register Architecture ...............................................................................................................................2-3 Register Page Pointer (PP)..................................................................................................................2-5 Register Set 1......................................................................................................................................2-6 Register Set 2......................................................................................................................................2-6 Prime Register Space..........................................................................................................................2-7 Working Registers ...............................................................................................................................2-8 Using the Register Points ....................................................................................................................2-9 Register Addressing.................................................................................................................................2-11 Common Working Register Area (C0H-CFH)......................................................................................2-13 4-Bit Working Register Addressing ......................................................................................................2-14 8-Bit Working Register Addressing ......................................................................................................2-16 System and User Stack ...........................................................................................................................2-18
Chapter 3
Addressing Modes
Overview .................................................................................................................................................3-1 Register Addressing Mode (R) .................................................................................................................3-2 Indirect Register Addressing Mode (IR)....................................................................................................3-3 Indexed Addressing Mode (X) ..................................................................................................................3-7 Direct Address Mode (DA) .......................................................................................................................3-10 Indirect Address Mode (IA) ......................................................................................................................3-12 Relative Address Mode (RA)....................................................................................................................3-13 Immediate Mode (IM) ..............................................................................................................................3-14
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
v
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 4 Control Registers
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Chapter 5
Interrupt Structure
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 5-1 Interrupt Types ............................................................................................................................... 5-2 S3C825A Interrupt Structure........................................................................................................... 5-3 Interrupt Vector Addresses ............................................................................................................. 5-5 Enable/Disable Interrupt Instructions (EI, DI) .................................................................................. 5-7 System-Level Interrupt Control Registers........................................................................................ 5-7 Interrupt Processing Control Points................................................................................................. 5-8 Peripheral Interrupt Control Registers ............................................................................................. 5-9 System Mode Register (SYM)......................................................................................................... 5-10 Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)......................................................................................................... 5-11 Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)....................................................................................................... 5-12 Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) .................................................................................................... 5-14 Interrupt Pending Function Types ................................................................................................... 5-15 Interrupt Source Polling Sequence.................................................................................................. 5-16 Interrupt Service Routines .............................................................................................................. 5-16 Generating Interrupt Vector Addresses ........................................................................................... 5-17 Nesting of Vectored Interrupts ........................................................................................................ 5-17 Instruction Pointer (IP).................................................................................................................... 5-17 Fast Interrupt Processing................................................................................................................ 5-17
Chapter 6
Instruction Set
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 6-1 Data Types ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1 Register Addressing........................................................................................................................ 6-1 Addressing Modes .......................................................................................................................... 6-1 Flags Register (Flags) .................................................................................................................... 6-6 Flag Descriptions............................................................................................................................ 6-7 Instruction Set Notation .................................................................................................................. 6-8 Condition Codes ............................................................................................................................. 6-12 Instruction Descriptions................................................................................................................... 6-13
vi
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
Table of Contents (Continued)
Part II Hardware Descriptions
Chapter 7 Clock Circuit
Overview .................................................................................................................................................7-1 System Clock Circuit .......................................................................................................................7-1 Main Oscillator Circuits....................................................................................................................7-2 Sub Oscillator Circuits .....................................................................................................................7-2 Clock Status During Power-Down Modes.........................................................................................7-3 System Clock Control Register (CLKCON) ......................................................................................7-4 Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON) ............................................................................................7-5 Switching the CPU Clock.................................................................................................................7-6
Chapter 8
RESET and Power-Down
System Reset ..........................................................................................................................................8-1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................8-1 Normal Mode Reset Operation ........................................................................................................8-1 Hardware Reset Values ...................................................................................................................8-2 Power-Down Modes.................................................................................................................................8-5 Stop Mode.......................................................................................................................................8-5 Idle Mode ........................................................................................................................................8-6
Chapter 9
I/O Ports
Overview .................................................................................................................................................9-1 Port Data Registers .........................................................................................................................9-3 Port 0, 1 ..........................................................................................................................................9-4 Port 2 ..............................................................................................................................................9-5 Port 3 ..............................................................................................................................................9-8 Port 4 ..............................................................................................................................................9-10 Port 5 ..............................................................................................................................................9-13 Port 6, 7, 8 ......................................................................................................................................9-15
Chapter 10
Basic Timer and Timer 0
Overview .................................................................................................................................................10-1 Basic Timer (BT) .....................................................................................................................................10-1 Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON) ...........................................................................................10-2 Basic Timer Function Description ....................................................................................................10-3 8-Bit Timer/Counter 0 ..............................................................................................................................10-5 Timer/Counter 0 Control Register (T0CON).....................................................................................10-5 Timer 0 Function Description...........................................................................................................10-8
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
vii
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 11 Timer 1
One 16-Bit Timer Mode (Timer 1) ........................................................................................................... 11-1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 11-1 Function Description....................................................................................................................... 11-1 Block Diagram................................................................................................................................ 11-3 Two 8-Bit Timers Mode (Timer A and B) ................................................................................................. 11-4 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 11-4 Function Description....................................................................................................................... 11-4
Chapter 12
8-bit Timer 2
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 12-1 Function Description....................................................................................................................... 12-1 Timer 2 Control Register (T2CON) ................................................................................................. 12-2 Block Diagram................................................................................................................................ 12-3
Chapter 13
16-bit Timer 3
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 13-1 Timer/Counter 3 Control Register (T3CON) ............................................................................................ 13-1 Timer 3 Function Description .................................................................................................................. 13-4
Chapter 14
Watch Timer
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 14-1 Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON)........................................................................................ 14-2 Watch Timer Circuit Diagram ......................................................................................................... 14-3
Chapter 15
LCD Controller/Driver
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 15-1 LCD Circuit Diagram....................................................................................................................... 15-2 LCD Ram Address Area ................................................................................................................. 15-3 LCD Control Register (LCON)......................................................................................................... 15-4 LCD Mode Control Register (LMOD), F3H at Bank 0 of Set 1 ......................................................... 15-5 LCD Voltage Dividing Resistors ...................................................................................................... 15-6
viii
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 16 10-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter
Overview .................................................................................................................................................16-1 Function Description ................................................................................................................................16-1 Conversion Timing ..........................................................................................................................16-2 A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON) .......................................................................................16-2 Internal Reference Voltage Levels...................................................................................................16-3 Block Diagram .........................................................................................................................................16-3
Chapter 17
Serial I/O Interface
Overview .................................................................................................................................................17-1 Programming Procedure......................................................................................................................17-1 SIO Control Registers (SIOCON).........................................................................................................17-2 SIO Pre-Scaler Register (SIOPS) ........................................................................................................17-3 SIO Block Diagram ..................................................................................................................................17-3 Serial I/O Timing Diagram (SIO0, SIO1)..............................................................................................17-4
Chapter 18
UART
Overview .................................................................................................................................................18-1 Programming Procedure......................................................................................................................18-1 UART Control Register (UARTCON) ...................................................................................................18-2 UART Interrupt Pending Bits................................................................................................................18-3 UART Data Register (Udata) ...............................................................................................................18-4 UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATA) .........................................................................................18-4 BAUD Rate Calculations......................................................................................................................18-4 Block Diagram .........................................................................................................................................18-6 UART Mode 0 Function Description.....................................................................................................18-7 Serial Port Mode 1 Function Description..............................................................................................18-8 Serial Port Mode 2 Function Description..............................................................................................18-9 Serial Port Mode 3 Function Description..............................................................................................18-10 Serial Communication for Multiprocessor Configurations .....................................................................18-11
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
ix
Table of Contents (Concluded)
Chapter 19 Electrical Data
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 19-1
Chapter 20
Mechanical Data
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 20-1
Chapter 21
S3P825A OTP
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 21-1 Operating Mode Characteristics...................................................................................................... 21-4
Chapter 22
Development Tools
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 22-1 SHINE ............................................................................................................................................ 22-1 SAMA Assembler ........................................................................................................................... 22-1 SASM88 ......................................................................................................................................... 22-1 HEX2ROM...................................................................................................................................... 22-1 Target Boards................................................................................................................................. 22-1 TB825A Target Board..................................................................................................................... 22-3 SMDS2+ Selection (SAM8) ............................................................................................................ 22-4 Idle LED ......................................................................................................................................... 22-4 Stop LED........................................................................................................................................ 22-4
x
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
List of Figures
Figure Number 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-15 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 Title Page Number
Block Diagram........................................................................................................1-3 S3C825A Pin Assignments (80-TQFP-1212) ..........................................................1-4 S3C825A Pin Assignments (80-QFP-1420) ............................................................1-5 Pin Circuit Type A ..................................................................................................1-8 Pin Circuit Type B (RESET) ...................................................................................1-8 Pin Circuit Type C ..................................................................................................1-8 Pin Circuit Type E-4 (P2, P3.4-P3.7, P4, P5) ........................................................1-8 Pin Circuit Type F-16 (P3.0-P3.3)...........................................................................1-9 Pin Circuit Type H-23 .............................................................................................1-9 Pin Circuit Type H-32(P0, P1, P6-P8).....................................................................1-9 Program Memory Address Space ...........................................................................2-2 Internal Register File Organization .........................................................................2-4 Register Page Pointer (PP) ....................................................................................2-5 Set 1, Set 2, Prime Area Register, and LCD Data Register Map .............................2-7 8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices)..................................................................2-8 Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block...........................................................2-9 Non-Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block ...................................................2-10 16-Bit Register Pair ................................................................................................2-11 Register File Addressing.........................................................................................2-12 Common Working Register Area ............................................................................2-13 4-Bit Working Register Addressing .........................................................................2-15 4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example ..........................................................2-15 8-Bit Working Register Addressing .........................................................................2-16 8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example ..........................................................2-17 Stack Operations....................................................................................................2-18 Register Addressing ...............................................................................................3-2 Working Register Addressing .................................................................................3-2 Indirect Register Addressing to Register File ..........................................................3-3 Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory...................................................3-4 Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File ............................................3-5 Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory ........................3-6 Indexed Addressing to Register File .......................................................................3-7 Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset ........................3-8 Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory ...................................................3-9 Direct Addressing for Load Instructions...................................................................3-10 Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions....................................................3-11 Indirect Addressing.................................................................................................3-12 Relative Addressing ...............................................................................................3-13 Immediate Addressing............................................................................................3-14
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
xi
List of Figures (Continued)
Figure Number 4-1 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 6-1 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-15 9-16 9-17 Title Page Number
Register Description Format .................................................................................. 4-4 S3C8-Series Interrupt Types.................................................................................. 5-2 S3C825A Interrupt Structure.................................................................................. 5-4 ROM Vector Address Area..................................................................................... 5-5 Interrupt Function Diagram .................................................................................... 5-8 System Mode Register (SYM)................................................................................ 5-10 Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)................................................................................ 5-11 Interrupt Request Priority Groups........................................................................... 5-12 Interrupt Priority Register (IPR).............................................................................. 5-13 Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) ........................................................................... 5-14 System Flags Register (FLAGS)............................................................................ 6-6 Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator (fx)............................................................................... 7-2 External Oscillator (fx)........................................................................................... 7-2 RC Oscillator (fx)................................................................................................... 7-2 Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator (fxt).............................................................................. 7-2 External Oscillator (fxt).......................................................................................... 7-2 System Clock Circuit Diagram ............................................................................... 7-3 System Clock Control Register (CLKCON) ............................................................ 7-4 Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON) .................................................................. 7-5 STOP Control Register (STPCON) ........................................................................ 7-7 Port Group 0 Control Register (PG0CON) ............................................................. 9-4 Port 2 High-Byte Control Register (P2CONH) ........................................................ 9-6 Port 2 Low-Byte Control Register (P2CONL).......................................................... 9-6 Port 2 Pull-up Control Register (P2PUR) ............................................................... 9-7 Port 2 Interrupt Control Register (P2INT) ............................................................... 9-7 Port 3 High-Byte Control Register (P3CONH) ........................................................ 9-8 Port 3 Low-Byte Control Register (P3CONL).......................................................... 9-9 Port 3 Pull-up Control Register (P3PUR) ............................................................... 9-9 Port 4 High-Byte Control Register (P4CONH) ........................................................ 9-10 Port 4 Low-Byte Control Register (P4CONL).......................................................... 9-11 Port 4 Interrupt Control Register (P4INT) ............................................................... 9-11 Port 4 Interrupt Pending Control Register (P4PND)................................................ 9-12 Port 4 Interrupt Edge Selection Register (P4EDGE) .............................................. 9-12 Port 5 High-Byte Control Register (P5CONH) ........................................................ 9-13 Port 5 Low-Byte Control Register (P5CONL).......................................................... 9-14 Port 5 Pull-up Control Register (P5PUR) ............................................................... 9-14 Port Group 1 Control Register (PG1CON) ............................................................. 9-15
xii
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
List of Figures (Continued)
Page Number 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-8 11-1 11-2 11-3 11-4 11-5 12-1 12-2 13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-5 13-6 14-1 14-2 15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-5 15-6 15-7 15-8 15-9 15-10 15-11 16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 Title Page Number
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON) ..................................................................10-2 Basic Timer Block Diagram ....................................................................................10-4 Timer 0 Control Register (T0CON) .........................................................................10-6 Interrupt Pending Register (INTPND)......................................................................10-7 Simplified Timer 0 Function Diagram: Interval Timer Mode ....................................10-8 Simplified Timer 0 Function Diagram: PWM Mode .................................................10-9 Simplified Timer 0 Function Diagram: Capture Mode .............................................10-10 Timer 0 Block Diagram...........................................................................................10-11 Timer 1 Control Register (TACON).........................................................................11-2 Timer 1 Functional Block Diagram..........................................................................11-3 Timer A Control Register (TACON) ........................................................................11-5 Timer B Control Register (TBCON) ........................................................................11-6 Timer A and B Function Block Diagram..................................................................11-7 Timer 2 Control Register (T2CON) .........................................................................12-2 Timer 2 Functional Block Diagram..........................................................................12-3 Timer 3 Control Register (T3CON) .........................................................................13-2 Interrupt Pending Register (INTPND)......................................................................13-3 Simplified Timer 3 Function Diagram: Interval Timer Mode ....................................13-4 Simplified Timer 3 Function Diagram: PWM Mode .................................................13-5 Simplified Timer 3 Function Diagram: Capture Mode .............................................13-6 Timer 3 Block Diagram...........................................................................................13-7 Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON) ...............................................................14-2 Watch Timer Circuit Diagram .................................................................................14-3 LCD Function Diagram ...........................................................................................15-1 LCD Circuit Diagram ..............................................................................................15-2 LCD Display Data RAM Organization .....................................................................15-3 LCD Control Register (LCON) ................................................................................15-4 LCD Bias Circuit Connection ..................................................................................15-6 Example 1 for the Usage of LCON.7-.6..................................................................15-7 Example 2 for the Usage of LCON.7-.6..................................................................15-8 LCD Signal Waveforms (1/3 Duty, 1/3 Bias)...........................................................15-9 LCD Signal Waveforms (1/4 Duty, 1/3 Bias)...........................................................15-10 LCD Signal Waveforms (1/8 Duty, 1/4 Bias)...........................................................15-11 LCD Signal Waveforms (1/8 Duty, 1/5 Bias)...........................................................15-13 A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON) ..............................................................16-2 A/D Converter Data Register (ADDATAH/ADDATAL) .............................................16-3 A/D Converter Functional Block Diagram ...............................................................16-3 Recommended A/D Converter Circuit for Highest Absolute Accuracy.....................16-4
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
xiii
List of Figures (Concluded)
Page Number 17-1 17-2 17-3 17-4 17-5 18-1 18-2 18-3 18-4 18-5 18-6 18-7 18-8 18-9 18-10 19-1 19-2 19-3 19-4 19-5 19-6 19-7 19-8 19-9 19-10 20-1 20-2 21-1 21-2 21-3 22-1 22-2 22-3 22-4 Title Page Number
Serial I/O Module Control Register (SIOCON) ....................................................... 17-2 SIO Prescaler Register (SIOPS) ............................................................................ 17-3 SIO Functional Block Diagram............................................................................... 17-3 Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at falling, SIOCON.4 = 0) ........... 17-4 Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at rising, SIOCON.4 = 1) ............ 17-4 UART Control Register (UARTCON) ..................................................................... 18-2 UART Interrupt Pending Bits (INTPND.5-.4).......................................................... 18-3 UART Data Register (UDATA)............................................................................... 18-4 UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATA) ........................................................... 18-4 UART Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................... 18-6 Timing Diagram for Serial Port Mode 0 Operation ................................................. 18-7 Timing Diagram for Serial Port Mode 1 Operation ................................................. 18-8 Timing Diagram for Serial Port Mode 2 Operation ................................................. 18-9 Timing Diagram for Serial Port Mode 3 Operation ................................................. 18-10 Connection Example for Multiprocessor Serial Data Communications ................... 18-12 Input Timing for External Interrupts (P2.4-P2.7, P4).............................................. 19-5 Input Timing for RESET ........................................................................................ 19-5 Stop Mode Release Timing Initiated by RESET..................................................... 19-6 Stop Mode Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts.................................................. 19-7 Serial Data Transfer Timing................................................................................... 19-9 Clock Timing Measurement at XIN ......................................................................... 19-11 Clock Timing Measurement at XTIN ....................................................................... 19-11 Operating Voltage Range ...................................................................................... 19-12 Waveform for UART Timing Characteristics .......................................................... 19-13 A.C. Timing Waveform for the UART Module ........................................................ 19-14 Package Dimensions (80-QFP-1420C) .................................................................. 20-1 Package Dimension (80-TQFP-1212) .................................................................... 20-2 S3P825A Pin Assignments (80-Pin TQFP Package).............................................. 21-2 S3P825A Pin Assignments (80-Pin QFP Package) ................................................ 21-3 Operating Voltage Range ...................................................................................... 21-5 SMDS Product Configuration (SMDS2+) ............................................................... 22-2 TB825A Target Board Configuration ...................................................................... 22-3 40-Pin Connectors (J101, J102) for TB825A.......................................................... 22-5 S3C825A Cables for 80-TQFP Package ................................................................ 22-6
xiv
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
List of Tables
Table Number 1-1 2-1 4-1 4-2 4-3 5-1 5-2 5-3 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 8-1 8-2 8-3 9-1 9-2 15-1 18-1 Title Page Number
S3C825A Pin Descriptions......................................................................................1-6 S3C825A Register Type Summary .........................................................................2-3 Set 1 Registers (INTPND/STPCON/OSCCON are in bank 0 of set 1).....................4-1 Set 1, Bank 0 Registers ..........................................................................................4-2 Set 1, Bank 1 Registers ..........................................................................................4-3 Interrupt Vectors.....................................................................................................5-6 Interrupt Control Register Overview........................................................................5-7 Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers...........................................................5-9 Instruction Group Summary....................................................................................6-2 Flag Notation Conventions .....................................................................................6-8 Instruction Set Symbols..........................................................................................6-8 Instruction Notation Conventions ............................................................................6-9 Opcode Quick Reference .......................................................................................6-10 Condition Codes.....................................................................................................6-12 S3C825A Set 1 Register and Values after RESET..................................................8-2 S3C825A Set 1, Bank 0 Register Values after RESET ...........................................8-3 S3C825A Set 1, Bank 1 Register Values after RESET ...........................................8-4 S3C825A Port Configuration Overview...................................................................9-2 Port Data Register Summary..................................................................................9-3 LCD Mode Control Register (LMOD) Organization..................................................15-5 Commonly Used Baud Rates Generated by BRDATA ............................................18-5
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
xv
List of Tables (Continued)
Table Number 19-1 19-2 19-3 19-4 19-5 19-6 19-7 19-8 19-9 19-10 19-11 19-12 21-1 21-2 21-3 22-1 22-2 Title Page Number
Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................... 19-2 D.C. Electrical Characteristics ............................................................................... 19-2 A.C. Electrical Characteristics................................................................................ 19-5 Input/Output Capacitance ...................................................................................... 19-6 Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode ........................................................ 19-6 A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics ................................................................ 19-8 Synchronous SIO Electrical Characteristics ........................................................... 19-9 Main Oscillator Characteristics .............................................................................. 19-10 Sub Oscillator Characteristics................................................................................ 19-10 Main Oscillator Stabilization Time.......................................................................... 19-11 Sub Oscillator Stabilization Time ........................................................................... 19-11 UART Timing Characteristics in Mode 0 (8 MHz)................................................... 19-13 Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the EPROM............................................ 21-4 Comparison of S3P825A and S3C825A Features .................................................. 21-4 Operating Mode Selection Criteria ......................................................................... 21-4 Power Selection Settings for TB825A .................................................................... 22-4 The SMDS2+ Tool Selection Setting ..................................................................... 22-4
xvi
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
List of Programming Tips
Description Chapter 2: Address Spaces Page Number
Using the Page Pointer for RAM clear (Page 0, Page1) .......................................................................2-5 Setting the Register Pointers ...............................................................................................................2-9 Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers...............................................................2-10 Addressing the Common Working Register Area .................................................................................2-14 Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP ..............................................................................2-19 Chapter 7: Clock Circuit
Switching the CPU clock......................................................................................................................7-6
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
xvii
List of Register Descriptions
Register Identifier ADCON BTCON CLKCON FLAGS IMR INTPND IPH IPL IPR IRQ LCON LMOD OSSCON P2CONH P2CONL P2PUR P2INT P3CONH P3CONL P3PUR P4CONH P4CONL P4EDGE P4INT P4PND P5CONH P5CONL P5PUR PG0CON PG1CON PP RP0 RP1 SIOCON SPH SPL STPCON SYM T0CON TACON TBCON T2CON T3CON UARTCON WTCON Full Register Name Page Number
A/D Converter Control Register ..............................................................................4-5 Basic Timer Control Register..................................................................................4-6 System Clock Control Register...............................................................................4-7 System Flags Register ...........................................................................................4-8 Interrupt Mask Register ..........................................................................................4-9 Interrupt Pending Register......................................................................................4-10 Instruction Pointer (High Byte) ...............................................................................4-11 Instruction Pointer (Low Byte) ................................................................................4-11 Interrupt Priority Register........................................................................................4-12 Interrupt Request Register......................................................................................4-13 LCD Control Register .............................................................................................4-14 LCD Mode Control Register....................................................................................4-15 Oscillator Control Register......................................................................................4-16 Port 2 Control Register (High Byte) ........................................................................4-17 Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte) .........................................................................4-18 Port 2 Pull-up Control Register ...............................................................................4-19 Port 2 Interrupt Control Register .............................................................................4-20 Port 3 Control Register (High Byte) ........................................................................4-21 Port 3 Control Register (Low Byte) .........................................................................4-22 Port 3 Pull-up Control Register ...............................................................................4-23 Port 4 Control Register (High Byte) ........................................................................4-24 Port 4 Control Register (Low Byte) .........................................................................4-25 Port 4 Interrupt Edge Selection Register.................................................................4-26 Port 4 Interrupt Control Register .............................................................................4-27 Port 4 Interrupt Pending Register ...........................................................................4-28 Port 5 Control Register (High Byte) ........................................................................4-29 Port 5 Control Register (Low Byte) .........................................................................4-30 Port 5 Pull-up Control Register ...............................................................................4-31 Port Group 0 Control Register ................................................................................4-32 Port Group 1 Control Register ................................................................................4-33 Register Page Pointer ............................................................................................4-34 Register Pointer 0...................................................................................................4-35 Register Pointer 1...................................................................................................4-35 SIO Control Register ..............................................................................................4-36 Stack Pointer (High Byte) .......................................................................................4-37 Stack Pointer (Low Byte) ........................................................................................4-37 Stop Control Register .............................................................................................4-38 System Mode Register ...........................................................................................4-39 Timer 0 Control Register ........................................................................................4-40 Timer 1/A Control Register .....................................................................................4-41 Timer B Control Register........................................................................................4-42 Timer 2 Control Register ........................................................................................4-43 Timer 3 Control Register ........................................................................................4-44 UART Control Register...........................................................................................4-45 Watch Timer Control Register ................................................................................4-46
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
xix
xx
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
List of Instruction Descriptions
Instruction Mnemonic ADC ADD AND BAND BCP BITC BITR BITS BOR BTJRF BTJRT BXOR CALL CCF CLR COM CP CPIJE CPIJNE DA DEC DECW DI DIV DJNZ EI ENTER EXIT IDLE INC INCW IRET JP JR LD LDB Full Register Name Page Number
Add with Carry........................................................................................................6-14 Add ........................................................................................................................6-15 Logical AND ...........................................................................................................6-16 Bit AND ..................................................................................................................6-17 Bit Compare ...........................................................................................................6-18 Bit Complement .....................................................................................................6-19 Bit Reset ................................................................................................................6-20 Bit Set ....................................................................................................................6-21 Bit OR ....................................................................................................................6-22 Bit Test, Jump Relative on False............................................................................6-23 Bit Test, Jump Relative on True .............................................................................6-24 Bit XOR..................................................................................................................6-25 Call Procedure .......................................................................................................6-26 Complement Carry Flag .........................................................................................6-27 Clear ......................................................................................................................6-28 Complement...........................................................................................................6-29 Compare ................................................................................................................6-30 Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal ..............................................................6-31 Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal .......................................................6-32 Decimal Adjust .......................................................................................................6-33 Decrement .............................................................................................................6-35 Decrement Word....................................................................................................6-36 Disable Interrupts ...................................................................................................6-37 Divide (Unsigned)...................................................................................................6-38 Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero ..........................................................................6-39 Enable Interrupts ....................................................................................................6-40 Enter ......................................................................................................................6-41 Exit ........................................................................................................................6-42 Idle Operation ........................................................................................................6-43 Increment...............................................................................................................6-44 Increment Word .....................................................................................................6-45 Interrupt Return ......................................................................................................6-46 Jump......................................................................................................................6-47 Jump Relative ........................................................................................................6-48 Load.......................................................................................................................6-49 Load Bit..................................................................................................................6-51
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
xxi
List of Instruction Descriptions (Continued)
Instruction Mnemonic LDC/LDE LDCD/LDED LDCI/LDEI LDCPD/LDEPD LDCPI/LDEPI LDW MULT NEXT NOP OR POP POPUD POPUI PUSH PUSHUD PUSHUI RCF RET RL RLC RR RRC SB0 SB1 SBC SCF SRA SRP/SRP0/SRP1 STOP SUB SWAP TCM TM WFI XOR Full Register Name Page Number
Load Memory .........................................................................................................6-52 Load Memory and Decrement ................................................................................6-54 Load Memory and Increment ..................................................................................6-55 Load Memory with Pre-Decrement .........................................................................6-56 Load Memory with Pre-Increment ...........................................................................6-57 Load Word .............................................................................................................6-58 Multiply (Unsigned).................................................................................................6-59 Next .......................................................................................................................6-60 No Operation..........................................................................................................6-61 Logical OR .............................................................................................................6-62 Pop from Stack.......................................................................................................6-63 Pop User Stack (Decrementing) .............................................................................6-64 Pop User Stack (Incrementing)...............................................................................6-65 Push to Stack .........................................................................................................6-66 Push User Stack (Decrementing)............................................................................6-67 Push User Stack (Incrementing) .............................................................................6-68 Reset Carry Flag ....................................................................................................6-69 Return ....................................................................................................................6-70 Rotate Left .............................................................................................................6-71 Rotate Left through Carry .......................................................................................6-72 Rotate Right ...........................................................................................................6-73 Rotate Right through Carry .....................................................................................6-74 Select Bank 0 .........................................................................................................6-75 Select Bank 1 .........................................................................................................6-76 Subtract with Carry .................................................................................................6-77 Set Carry Flag ........................................................................................................6-78 Shift Right Arithmetic..............................................................................................6-79 Set Register Pointer ...............................................................................................6-80 Stop Operation .......................................................................................................6-81 Subtract..................................................................................................................6-82 Swap Nibbles .........................................................................................................6-83 Test Complement under Mask................................................................................6-84 Test under Mask.....................................................................................................6-85 Wait for Interrupt ....................................................................................................6-86 Logical Exclusive OR .............................................................................................6-87
xxii
S3C825A/P825A MICROCONTROLLER
S3C825A/P825A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8-SERIES MICROCONTROLLERS
Samsung's S3C8 series of 8-bit single-chip CMOS microcontrollers offers a fast and efficient CPU, a wide range of integrated peripherals, and various mask-programmable ROM sizes. Among the major CPU features are: -- Efficient register-oriented architecture -- Selectable CPU clock sources -- Idle and Stop power-down mode release by interrupt -- Built-in basic timer with watchdog function A sophisticated interrupt structure recognizes up to eight interrupt levels. Each level can have one or more interrupt sources and vectors. Fast interrupt processing (within a minimum of four CPU clocks) can be assigned to specific interrupt levels.
S3C825A MICROCONTROLLER
The S3C825A single-chip microcontroller are fabricated using the highly advanced CMOS process. Its design is based on the powerful SAM88RC CPU core. Stop and idle (power-down) modes were implemented to reduce power consumption. The S3C825A is a microcontroller with a 48K-byte mask-programmable ROM embedded. The S3P825A is a microcontroller with a 48K-byte one-time-programmable ROM embedded. Using the SAM88RC modular design approach, the following peripherals were integrated with the SAM88RC CPU core: -- Large number of programmable I/O ports (Total 67 pins) -- Synchronous SIO module -- Two 8-bit timer/counters -- Two 16-bit timer/counters -- LCD controller/driver -- A/D converter with 4 selectable input pins
OTP
The S3C825A microcontroller is also available in OTP (One Time Programmable) version, S3P825A. The S3P825A microcontroller has an on-chip 48K-byte one-time-programmable EPROM instead of masked ROM. The S3P825A is comparable to S3C825A, both in function and in pin configuration.
1-1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C825A/P825A
FEATURES
CPU * SAM88RC CPU core Watch Timer * * Interval Time: 3.19ms, 0.25s, 0.5s, 1.0s at 32.768 kHz 0.5/1/2/4 kHz buzzer output selectable
Memory * * 2064-byte internal register file (including LCD display RAM) 48K-byte internal program memory area
Analog to Digital Converter * * * 4-channel analog input 10-bit conversion resolution 25s conversion time
Instruction Set * * 78 instructions Idle and Stop instructions
Serial I/O Interface * * * 8-bit transmit/receive mode 8-bit receive mode Selectable baud rate or external clock source
67 I/O Pins * * 31 normal I/O pins 36 pins sharing with LCD signals
UART Interrupts * * 8 interrupt levels and 23 internal sources Fast interrupt processing feature * * Full-duplex serial I/O interface Four programmable operating modes
8-Bit Basic Timer * * Watchdog timer function 4 kinds of clock source
LCD Controller/Driver * * * 28 segments and 8 common terminals 3, 4, and 8 common selectable Internal resistor circuit for LCD bias
Timer/Counter 0 * * * Programmable 8-bit internal timer External event counter function PWM and capture function
Two Power-Down Modes * * Idle mode: only CPU clock stops Stop mode: system clock and CPU clock stop
Timer/Counter 1 * * * One 16-bit timer/counter mode Two 8-bit timer/counters A/B mode External event counter function
Oscillation Source * * Crystal, ceramic, or RC for main clock Crystal for sub clock (32.768 kHz)
Instruction Execution Time * * 500 ns at fx=8 MHz (minimum, main clock) 122s at fxt=32.768 kHz (sub clock) -25 C to +85 C
Timer/Counter 2 * * Programmable 8-bit interval timer External event counter function
Operating Temperature Range *
Timer/Counter 3 * * * Programmable 16-bit interval timer External event counter function PWM and capture function
Operating Voltage Range * * * 2.0 V to 5.5 V at 4 MHz (main clock) 2.2 V to 5.5 V at 8 MHz (main clock) 2.0 V to 5.5 V at 32.768 kHz (sub clock)
Package Type * 80-pin TQFP-1212, 80-pin QFP-1420
1-2
S3C825A/P825A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
BLOCK DIAGRAM
RESET XIN XOUT XTIN XTOUT P2.4/T0CLK P3.7/T0CAP P3.7/T0OUT/T0PWM P2.5/T1CLK P2.6/TAOUT P2.7/TBOUT P2.2/T2CLK P2.3/T2OUT P3.5/T3CLK P3.6/T3CAP P3.6/T3OUT/T3PWM P5.0/SCK P5.1/SI P5.2/SO Watchdog Timer
P1.4-P1.7/ INT0-INT3
P4.0-P4.7/ INT4-INT11 P0.0-P0.7/ SEG16-SEG23 P1.0-P1.7/ SEG24-SEG31 P2.0 P2.1 P2.2/T2CLK P2.3/T2OUT P2.4/INT0/T0CLK P2.5/INT1/T1CLK P2.6/INT2/TAOUT P2.7/INT3/TBOUT P3.0/AD0 P3.1/AD1 P3.2/AD2 P3.3/AD3 P3.4 P3.5/T3CLK P3.6/T3OUT/P P3.6/T3OUT/ P3.7/T0OUT/ T0PWM/T0CAP P4.0-P4.7/ INT4-INT11
Main OSC
Port 0
Sub OSC
Port 1
8-Bit Timer/Counter0
I/O Port and Interrupt Control
Port 2
Timer 1
8-bit Timer A 8-bit Timer A
8-Bit Timer/Counter2
Port 3
16-Bit Timer/Counter3
SAM88RC Core
SIO
Port 4
Port 5 Basic Timer
P5.0/SCK P5.1/SI P5.2/SO P5.3/BUZ P5.4/RXD P5.5/TXD P6.0/COM0 P6.1/COM1 P6.2/COM2 P6.3/COM3 P6.4/COM4/SEG0 P6.5/COM5/SEG1 P6.6/COM6/SEG2 P6.7/COM7/SEG3 P7.0-P7.7/ SEG4-SEG11 P8.0-P8.3/ SEG12-SEG15 P3.0-P3.3/ AD0-AD3
P5.0/BUZ
Watch Timer Port 6
P5.4/RXD P5.5/TXD P6.0-P6.3/ COM0-COM3 P6.4-P6.7/ COM4-COM7/ SEG0-SEG3 P7.0-P8.3/ SEG4-SEG15 P0.0-P1.7/ SEG16-SEG31 VLC1
UART
48K-byte ROM
LCD Driver/Controller
2064-byte Register File
Port 7
Port 8
10-bit ADC
TEST
VDD1/VDD2
VSS1/VSS2
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram
1-3
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C825A/P825A
PIN ASSIGNMENT
P1.1/SEG25 P1.2/SEG26 P1.3/SEG27 P1.4/SEG28 P1.5/SEG29 P1.6/SEG30 P1.7/SEG31 P2.0 P2.1 VDD1 VSS1 XOUT XIN TEST XTIN XTOUT RESET P2.2/T2CLK P2.3/T2OUT P2.4/INT0/T0CLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P1.0/SEG24 P0.7/SEG23 P0.6/SEG22 P0.5/SEG21 P0.4/SEG20 P0.3/SEG19 P0.2/SEG18 P0.1/SEG17 P0.0/SEG16 P8.3/SEG15 P8.2/SEG14 P8.1/SEG13 P8.0/SEG12 P7.7/SEG11 P7.6/SEG10 P7.5/SEG9 P7.4/SEG8 P7.3/SEG7 P7.2/SEG6 P7.1/SEG5
S3C825A
(80-TQFP-1212)
P7.0/SEG4 P6.7/SEG3/COM7 P6.6/SEG2/COM6 P6.5/SEG1/COM5 P6.4/SEG0/COM4 P6.3/COM3 P6.2/COM2 P6.1/COM1 P6.0/COM0 VDD2 VSS2 VLC1 P5.6 P5.5/TXD P5.4/RXD P5.3/BUZ P5.2/SO P5.1/SI P5.0/SCK P4.7/INT11
Figure 1-2. S3C825A Pin Assignments (80-TQFP-1212)
1-4
P2.5/INT1/T1CLK P2.6/INT2/TAOUT P2.7/INT3/TBOUT AVREF P3.0/AD0 P3.1/AD1 P3.2/AD2 P3.3/AD3 AVSS P3.4 P3.5/T3CLK P3.6/T3OUT/T3PWM/T3CAP P3.7/T0OUT/T0PWM/T0CAP P4.0/INT4 P4.1/INT5 P4.2/INT6 P4.3/INT7 P4.4/INT8 P4.5/INT9 P4.6/INT10
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
S3C825A/P825A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
P0.7/SEG23 P1.0/SEG24 P1.1/SEG25 P1.2/SEG26 P1.3/SEG27 P1.4/SEG28 P1.5/SEG29 P1.6/SEG30 P1.7/SEG31 P2.0 P2.1 VDD1 VSS1 XOUT XIN TEST XTIN XTOUT RESET P2.2/T2CLK P2.3/T2OUT P2.4/INT0/T0CLK P2.5/INT1/T1CLK P2.6/INT2/TAOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P0.6/SEG22 P0.5/SEG21 P0.4/SEG20 P0.3/SEG19 P0.2/SEG18 P0.1/SEG17 P0.0/SEG16 P8.3/SEG15 P8.2/SEG14 P8.1/SEG13 P8.0/SEG12 P7.7/SEG11 P7.6/SEG10 P7.5/SEG9 P7.4/SEG8 P7.3/SEG7
S3C825A
(80-QFP-1420C)
P7.2/SEG6 P7.1/SEG5 P7.0/SEG4 P6.7/SEG3/COM7 P6.6/SEG2/COM6 P6.5/SEG1/COM5 P6.4/SEG0/COM4 P6.3/COM3 P6.2/COM2 P6.1/COM1 P6.0/COM0 VDD2 VSS2 VLC1 P5.6 P5.5/TXD P5.4/RXD P5.3/BUZ P5.2/SO P5.1/SI P5.0/SCK P4.7/INT11 P4.6/INT10 P4.5/INT9
Figure 1-3. S3C825A Pin Assignments (80-QFP-1420)
P2.7/INT3/TBOUT AVREF P3.0/AD0 P3.1/AD1 P3.2/AD2 P3.3/AD3 AVSS P3.4 P3.5/T3CLK P3.6/T3OUT/T3PWM/T3CAP P3.7/T0OUT/T0PWM/T0CAP P4.0/INT4 P4.1/INT5 P4.2/INT6 P4.3/INT7 P4.4/INT8
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
1-5
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C825A/P825A
PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Table 1-1. S3C825A Pin Descriptions Pin Names P0.0-P0.7 Pin Type I/O Pin Description 4-bit-programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups. 4-bit-programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups. 1-bit-programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, opendrain output and software assignable pullups. P2.4-P2.7: Alternately used for external interrupt input (Noise filters, interrupt enable and pending control) I/O 1-bit-programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output, and software assignable pull-ups. F-16 E-4 Circuit Type H-32 Pin Numbers 72-79 (74-80, 1) 80, 1-7 (2-9) 8 (10) 9 (11) 18 (20) 19 (21) 20 (22) 21 (23) 22 (24) 23 (25) 25-28 (27-30) 30(32) 31(33) 32(34) 33(35) 34-41 (36-43) Share Pins SEG16 - SEG23 SEG24 - SEG31 - - T2CLK T2OUT INT0/T0CLK INT1/T1CLK INT2/TAOUT INT3/TBOUT AD0-AD3 - T3CLK
T3OUT/T3PWM/T3CAP T0OUT/T0PWM/T0CAP
P1.0-1.7
I/O
H-32
P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 P3.0-P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 P3.6 P3.7 P4.0-P4.7
I/O
E-4
I/O
1-bit-programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, opendrain output and software assignable pullups. P4.0-P4.7: Alternately used for external interrupt input (Noise filters, interrupt enable and pending control)
E-4
INT4-INT11
P5.0 P5.1 P5.2 P5.3 P5.4 P5.5 P5.6 P6.0-P6.3 P6.4-P6.7 P7.0-P7.7 P8.0-P8.3
I/O
1-bit-programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, opendrain output and software assignable pullups.
E-4
42 (44) 43 (45) 44 (46) 45 (47) 46 (48) 47 (49) 48 (50) 52-55(54-57) 56-59(58-61)
SCK SI SO BUZ RXD TXD - COM0-COM3 COM4-COM7/ SEG0-SEG3 SEG4-SEG11 SEG12-SEG15
I/O
4-bit programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output and software assignable pull-ups.
H-32
I/O I/O
H-32 H-32
60-67(62-69) 68-71(70-73)
NOTE: Parentheses indicate pin number for 80-QFP-1420 package.
1-6
S3C825A/P825A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Table 1-1. S3C825A Pin Descriptions (Continued) Pin Names VSS1, VDD1 XOUT, XIN TEST XTIN, XTOUT RESET INT0-INT3 T0CLK T0OUT T0PWM T0CAP T1CLK TAOUT TBOUT T2CLK T2OUT T3CLK T3OUT T3PWM T3CAP AD0-AD3 AVREF, AVSS INT4-INT11 BUZ SCK, SI, SO RXD, TXD VLC1 VSS2, VDD2 COM0-COM3 SEG0-SEG3 (COM4-COM7) SEG4-SEG11 SEG12-SEG15 SEG16-SEG23 SEG24-SEG31 Pin Type - - - - I I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O - I/O I/O I/O I/O - - I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Pin Description Power input pins for core block Main oscillator pins Test signal input pin (must be connected to VSS) Sub oscillator pins System reset pin External interrupt input pins Timer 0 external clock input. Timer 0 clock output Timer 0 PWM output Timer 0 capture input Timer 1/A external clock input. Timer 1/A clock output Timer B clock output Timer 2 external clock input. Timer 2 clock output Timer 3 external clock input. Timer 3 clock output Timer 3 PWM output Timer 3 capture input Analog input pins for A/D convert module
A/D converter reference voltage and ground
Circuit Type - - - - B E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 F-16 - E-4 E-4 E-4 E-4 - - H-32 H-32 H-32 H-32 H-32 H-32
Pin Numbers (note) 10, 11 (12, 13) 12, 13 (14, 15) 14 (16) 15, 16 (17,18) 17 (19) 20-23 (22-25) 20 (22) 33 (35) 33 (35) 33 (35) 21 (23) 22 (24) 23 (25) 18 (20) 19 (21) 31 (33) 32 (34) 32 (34) 32 (34) 25-28 (27-30) 24, 29 (26, 31) 34-41 (36-43) 45 (47) 42-44 (44-46) 46-47 (48-49) 49 (51) 50, 51 (52, 53) 52-55 (54-57) 56-59 (58-61) 60-67 (62-69) 68-71 (70-73) 72-79 (74-80, 1) 80, 1-7 (2-9)
Share Pins - - - - - P2.4-P2.7 P2.4 P3.7 P3.7 P3.7 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 P2.2 P2.3 P3.5 P3.6 P3.6 P3.6 P3.0-P3.3 - P4.0-P4.7 P5.3 P5.0-P5.2 P5.4-P5.5 - - P6.0-P6.3 P6.4-P6.7 P7.0-P7.7 P8.0-P8.3 P0.0-P0.7 P1.0-P1.7
External interrupt input pins Buzzer signal output Serial clock, serial data input, serial data output UART data input, output LCD bias voltage input pins Power input pins for peripheral block LCD Common signal output LCD Common or Segment signal output LCD segment signal output LCD segment signal output LCD segment signal output LCD segment signal output
NOTE: Parentheses indicate pin number for 80-QFP-1420 package.
1-7
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C825A/P825A
PIN CIRCUITS
VDD Open-drain P-Channel In N-Channel Output Disable Data
VDD
P-Channel Out N-Channel
Figure 1-4. Pin Circuit Type A
Figure 1-6. Pin Circuit Type C
VDD Open-Drain Enable Pull-up Resistor Pull-up Enable P-CH Data I/O N-CH Output Disable
VDD Pull-up Resistor
VDD
In Schmitt Trigger
VSS
Schmitt Trigger
Figure 1-5. Pin Circuit Type B (RESET RESET)
Figure 1-7. Pin Circuit Type E-4 (P2, P3.4-P3.7, P4, P5)
1-8
S3C825A/P825A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
VDD
VLC1
VLC2
Pull-up Enable Open-drain Data Output Disable
VLC3
Circuit Type C
I/O
COM/SEG Out
ADCEN
Output Disable VLC4 VLC5
ADC Select Data
To ADC
VSS
Figure 1-8. Pin Circuit Type F-16 (P3.0-P3.3)
Figure 1-9. Pin Circuit Type H-23
VDD Pull-up Resistor Resistor Enable P-CH I/O N-CH
VDD Open Drain Data Output Disable1 COM/SEG Output Disable2 Circuit Type H-23
Figure 1-10. Pin Circuit Type H-32(P0, P1, P6-P8)
1-9
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
1-10
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESS SPACES
2
OVERVIEW
ADDRESS SPACES
The S3C825A microcontroller has two types of address space: -- Internal program memory (ROM) -- Internal register file A 16-bit address bus supports program memory operations. A separate 8-bit register bus carries addresses and data between the CPU and the register file. The S3C825A has an internal 48-Kbyte mask-programmable ROM. The 256-byte physical register space is expanded into an addressable area of 320 bytes using addressing modes. A 32-byte LCD display register file is implemented. There are 2,137 mapped registers in the internal register file. Of these, 2,064 are for general-purpose. (This number includes a 16-byte working register common area used as a "scratch area" for data operations, eight 192-byte prime register areas, and eight 64-byte areas (Set 2)). Thirteen 8-bit registers are used for the CPU and the system control, and 60 registers are mapped for peripheral controls and data registers. Seven register locations are not mapped.
2-1
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C825A/P825A
PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
Program memory (ROM) stores program codes or table data. The S3C825A has 48K bytes internal maskprogrammable program memory. The first 256 bytes of the ROM (0H-0FFH) are reserved for interrupt vector addresses. Unused locations in this address range can be used as normal program memory. If you use the vector address area to store a program code, be careful not to overwrite the vector addresses stored in these locations. The ROM address at which a program execution starts after a reset is 0100H.
(Decimal) 49,151 48K-bytes Internal Program Memory Area
(HEX) BFFFH
255 Interrupt Vector Area 0
FFH
0H
Figure 2-1. Program Memory Address Space
2-2
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER ARCHITECTURE
In the S3C825A implementation, the upper 64-byte area of register files is expanded two 64-byte areas, called set 1 and set 2. The upper 32-byte area of set 1 is further expanded two 32-byte register banks (bank 0 and bank 1), and the lower 32-byte area is a single 32-byte common area. In case of S3C825A the total number of addressable 8-bit registers is 2137. Of these 2137 registers, 13 bytes are for CPU and system control registers, 60 bytes are for peripheral control and data registers, 16 bytes are used as a shared working registers, and 2048 registers are for general-purpose use, page 0-page 7 (including 32 bytes for LCD display registers). You can always address set 1 register locations, regardless of which of the eight register pages is currently selected. Set 1 locations, however, can only be addressed using register addressing modes. The extension of register space into separately addressable areas (sets, banks, and pages) is supported by various addressing mode restrictions, the select bank instructions, SB0 and SB1, and the register page pointer (PP). Specific register types and the area (in bytes) that they occupy in the register file are summarized in Table 2-1. Table 2-1. S3C825A Register Type Summary Register Type General-purpose registers (including the 16-byte common working register area, eight 192-byte prime register area (including LCD data registers), and eight 64-byte set 2 area). CPU and system control registers Mapped clock, peripheral, I/O control, and data registers Total Addressable Bytes Number of Bytes 2,064
13 60 2,137
2-3
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C825A/P825A
FFH Set 1 FFH FFH 32 Bytes Bank 1 FFH FFH FFH
Page 7 Page 1 Page 0
Bank 0 System and Peripheral Control System and Registers Peripheral Control Registers (Register Addressing Mode) System Registers (Register Addressing Mode) Working Registers (Working Register Addressing Only)
Set 2 Registers (Indirect Register, Indexed Mode, and Stack Operations) 256 Bytes C0H BFH Page 0
64 Bytes
E0H DFH D0H CFH C0H
~ ~
~ Page 7 192 Bytes Prime Data Registers (All Addressing Modes) ~ ~
1FH 32 Bytes 00H
~
~
~
Prime Data Registers (All Addressing Modes) LCD Display Register
~
00H
Figure 2-2. Internal Register File Organization
2-4
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER PAGE POINTER (PP) The S3C8-series architecture supports the logical expansion of the physical 256-byte internal register file (using an 8-bit data bus) into as many as 16 separately addressable register pages. Page addressing is controlled by the register page pointer (PP, DFH). In the S3C825A microcontroller, a paged register file expansion is implemented for LCD data registers, and the register page pointer must be changed to address other pages. After a reset, the page pointer's source value (lower nibble) and the destination value (upper nibble) are always "0000", automatically selecting page 0 as the source and destination page for register addressing.
Register Page Pointer (PP) DFH ,Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Destination register page selection bits: 0000 Destination: Page 0
Source register page selection bits: 0000 Source: Page 0
NOTE:
A hardware reset operation writes the 4-bit destination and source values shown above to the register page pointer. These values should be modified to address other pages.
Figure 2-3. Register Page Pointer (PP)
+ PROGRAMMING TIP -- Using the Page Pointer for RAM clear (Page 0, Page 1)
LD SRP LD CLR DJNZ CLR LD LD CLR DJNZ CLR PP,#00H #0C0H R0,#0FFH @R0 R0,RAMCL0 @R0 PP,#10H R0,#0FFH @R0 R0,RAMCL1 @R0 ; Destination 0, Source 0 ; Page 0 RAM clear starts
RAMCL0
; R0 = 00H ; Destination 1, Source 0 ; Page 1 RAM clear starts
RAMCL1
; R0 = 00H
NOTE: You should refer to page 6-39 and use DJNZ instruction properly when DJNZ instruction is used in your program.
2-5
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C825A/P825A
REGISTER SET 1 The term set 1 refers to the upper 64 bytes of the register file, locations C0H-FFH. The upper 32-byte area of this 64-byte space (E0H-FFH) is expanded two 32-byte register banks, bank 0 and bank 1. The set register bank instructions, SB0 or SB1, are used to address one bank or the other. A hardware reset operation always selects bank 0 addressing. The upper two 32-byte areas (bank 0 and bank 1) of set 1 (E0H-FFH) contains 57 mapped system and peripheral control registers. The lower 32-byte area contains 16 system registers (D0H-DFH) and a 16-byte common working register area (C0H-CFH). You can use the common working register area as a "scratch" area for data operations being performed in other areas of the register file. Registers in set 1 locations are directly accessible at all times using Register addressing mode. The 16-byte working register area can only be accessed using working register addressing (For more information about working register addressing, please refer to Chapter 3, "Addressing Modes.") REGISTER SET 2 The same 64-byte physical space that is used for set 1 locations C0H-FFH is logically duplicated to add another 64 bytes of register space. This expanded area of the register file is called set 2. For the S3C825A, the set 2 address range (C0H-FFH) is accessible on pages 0-7. The logical division of set 1 and set 2 is maintained by means of addressing mode restrictions. You can use only Register addressing mode to access set 1 locations. In order to access registers in set 2, you must use Register Indirect addressing mode or Indexed addressing mode. The set 2 register area of page 0 is commonly used for stack operations.
2-6
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESS SPACES
PRIME REGISTER SPACE The lower 192 bytes (00H-BFH) of the S3C825A's eight 256-byte register pages is called prime register area. Prime registers can be accessed using any of the seven addressing modes (see Chapter 3, "Addressing Modes.") The prime register area on page 0 is immediately addressable following a reset. In order to address prime registers on pages 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7, you must set the register page pointer (PP) to the appropriate source and destination values.
FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH Set 1 Bank 0 FFH FCH E0H D0H C0H C0H BFH Bank 1 FFH FFH
Page 7 Page 6
Page 5 Page 4
Page 3
Page 2 Set 2 Page 1 Set 2 Page 0 Set 2 C0H BFH Page 0 Set 2
Page 7 Page 0 Prime Space 1FH LCD Data Register Area 00H
CPU and system control General-purpose Peripheral and I/O LCD data register 00H
Prime Space 00H
Figure 2-4. Set 1, Set 2, Prime Area Register, and LCD Data Register Map
2-7
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C825A/P825A
WORKING REGISTERS Instructions can access specific 8-bit registers or 16-bit register pairs using either 4-bit or 8-bit address fields. When 4-bit working register addressing is used, the 256-byte register file can be seen by the programmer as one that consists of 32 8-byte register groups or "slices." Each slice comprises of eight 8-bit registers. Using the two 8-bit register pointers, RP1 and RP0, two working register slices can be selected at any one time to form a 16-byte working register block. Using the register pointers, you can move this 16-byte register block anywhere in the addressable register file, except the set 2 area. The terms slice and block are used in this manual to help you visualize the size and relative locations of selected working register spaces: -- One working register slice is 8 bytes (eight 8-bit working registers, R0-R7 or R8-R15) -- One working register block is 16 bytes (sixteen 8-bit working registers, R0-R15) All the registers in an 8-byte working register slice have the same binary value for their five most significant address bits. This makes it possible for each register pointer to point to one of the 24 slices in the register file. The base addresses for the two selected 8-byte register slices are contained in register pointers RP0 and RP1. After a reset, RP0 and RP1 always point to the 16-byte common area in set 1 (C0H-CFH).
Slice 32 11111XXX RP1 (Registers R8-R15) Each register pointer points to one 8-byte slice of the register space, selecting a total 16-byte working register block. Slice 31
FFH F8H F7H F0H Set 1 Only
CFH C0H
~
00000XXX RP0 (Registers R0-R7) Slice 2 Slice 1
~
10H FH 8H 7H 0H
Figure 2-5. 8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices)
2-8
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESS SPACES
USING THE REGISTER POINTS Register pointers RP0 and RP1, mapped to addresses D6H and D7H in set 1, are used to select two movable 8-byte working register slices in the register file. After a reset, they point to the working register common area: RP0 points to addresses C0H-C7H, and RP1 points to addresses C8H-CFH. To change a register pointer value, you load a new value to RP0 and/or RP1 using an SRP or LD instruction. (see Figures 2-6 and 2-7). With working register addressing, you can only access those two 8-bit slices of the register file that are currently pointed to by RP0 and RP1. You cannot, however, use the register pointers to select a working register space in set 2, C0H-FFH, because these locations can be accessed only using the Indirect Register or Indexed addressing modes. The selected 16-byte working register block usually consists of two contiguous 8-byte slices. As a general programming guideline, it is recommended that RP0 point to the "lower" slice and RP1 point to the "upper" slice (see Figure 2-6). In some cases, it may be necessary to define working register areas in different (noncontiguous) areas of the register file. In Figure 2-7, RP0 points to the "upper" slice and RP1 to the "lower" slice. Because a register pointer can point to either of the two 8-byte slices in the working register block, you can flexibly define the working register area to support program requirements.
+ PROGRAMMING TIP -- Setting the Register Pointers
SRP SRP1 SRP0 CLR LD #70H #48H #0A0H RP0 RP1,#0F8H ; ; ; ; ; RP0 RP0 RP0 RP0 RP0 70H, RP1 78H no change, RP1 48H, A0H, RP1 no change 00H, RP1 no change no change, RP1 0F8H
Register File Contains 32 8-Byte Slices 00001XXX RP1 00000XXX RP0 8-Byte Slice 8-Byte Slice
FH (R15) 8H 7H 0H (R0)
16-Byte Contiguous Working Register block
Figure 2-6. Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block
2-9
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C825A/P825A
8-Byte Slice
F7H (R7) F0H (R0)
11110 RP0 00000 RP1
XXX
Register File Contains 32 8-Byte Slices
16-Byte Contiguous working Register block 7H (R15) 0H (R0)
XXX
8-Byte Slice
Figure 2-7. Non-Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block
+ PROGRAMMING TIP -- Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers
Calculate the sum of registers 80H-85H using the register pointer. The register addresses from 80H through 85H contain the values 10H, 11H, 12H, 13H, 14H, and 15 H, respectively: SRP0 ADD ADC ADC ADC ADC #80H R0,R1 R0,R2 R0,R3 R0,R4 R0,R5 ; ; ; ; ; ; RP0 80H R0 R0 + R0 R0 + R0 R0 + R0 R0 + R0 R0 +
R1 R2 + C R3 + C R4 + C R5 + C
The sum of these six registers, 6FH, is located in the register R0 (80H). The instruction string used in this example takes 12 bytes of instruction code and its execution time is 36 cycles. If the register pointer is not used to calculate the sum of these registers, the following instruction sequence would have to be used: ADD ADC ADC ADC ADC 80H,81H 80H,82H 80H,83H 80H,84H 80H,85H ; ; ; ; ; 80H 80H 80H 80H 80H (80H) (80H) (80H) (80H) (80H) + + + + + (81H) (82H) (83H) (84H) (85H)
+ + + +
C C C C
Now, the sum of the six registers is also located in register 80H. However, this instruction string takes 15 bytes of instruction code rather than 12 bytes, and its execution time is 50 cycles rather than 36 cycles.
2-10
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER ADDRESSING
The S3C8-series register architecture provides an efficient method of working register addressing that takes full advantage of shorter instruction formats to reduce execution time. With Register (R) addressing mode, in which the operand value is the content of a specific register or register pair, you can access any location in the register file except for set 2. With working register addressing, you use a register pointer to specify an 8-byte working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space. Registers are addressed either as a single 8-bit register or as a paired 16-bit register space. In a 16-bit register pair, the address of the first 8-bit register is always an even number and the address of the next register is always an odd number. The most significant byte of the 16-bit data is always stored in the even-numbered register, and the least significant byte is always stored in the next (+1) odd-numbered register. Working register addressing differs from Register addressing as it uses a register pointer to identify a specific 8-byte working register space in the internal register file and a specific 8-bit register within that space.
MSB Rn
LSB Rn+1
n = Even address
Figure 2-8. 16-Bit Register Pair
2-11
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C825A/P825A
Special-Purpose Registers Bank 1 FFH Control Registers E0H D0H C0H BFH RP1 Register Pointers RP0 Each register pointer (RP) can independently point to one of the 24 8-byte "slices" of the register file (other than set 2). After a reset, RP0 points to locations C0H-C7H and RP1 to locations C8H-CFH (that is, to the common working register area). NOTE: In the S3C825A microcontroller, pages 0-7 are implemented. Pages 0-7 contain all of the addressable registers in the internal register file. System Registers CFH Bank 0
General-Purpose Register
FFH
Set 2
C0H
Prime Registers
LCD Data Registers
00H
Page 0 Register Addressing Only All Addressing Modes
Page 0 Indirect Register, Indexed Addressing Modes All Addressing Modes Can be Pointed by register Pointer
Can be Pointed by Register Pointer
Figure 2-9. Register File Addressing
2-12
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESS SPACES
COMMON WORKING REGISTER AREA (C0H-CFH) After a reset, register pointers RP0 and RP1 automatically select two 8-byte register slices in set 1, locations C0H-CFH, as the active 16-byte working register block: RP0 C0H-C7H RP1 C8H-CFH This 16-byte address range is called common area. That is, locations in this area can be used as working registers by operations that address any location on any page in the register file. Typically, these working registers serve as temporary buffers for data operations between different pages.
FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH Set 1 FFH FCH E0H D0H C0H C0H BFH Page 0 Prime Space FFH
Page 7 Page 6
Page 5 Page 4
Page 3
Page 2 Set 2 Page 1 Set 2 Page 0 Set C0H 2 BFH Page 0 Set 2
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
00H 1FH LCD Data Registers Page 7
Following a hardware reset, register pointers RP0 and RP1 point to the common working register area, locations C0H-CFH. RP0 = RP1 = 1100 1100 0000 1000 00H
~
Prime Space
~ ~
Figure 2-10. Common Working Register Area
2-13
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C825A/P825A
+ PROGRAMMING TIP -- Addressing the Common Working Register Area
As the following examples show, you should access working registers in the common area, locations C0H-CFH, using working register addressing mode only. Examples 1. LD SRP LD 0C2H,40H #0C0H R2,40H ; Invalid addressing mode!
Use working register addressing instead: ; R2 (C2H) the value in location 40H
2. ADD 0C3H,#45H ; Invalid addressing mode! Use working register addressing instead: SRP ADD #0C0H R3,#45H ; R3 (C3H) R3 + 45H
4-BIT WORKING REGISTER ADDRESSING Each register pointer defines a movable 8-byte slice of working register space. The address information stored in a register pointer serves as an addressing "window" that makes it possible for instructions to access working registers very efficiently using short 4-bit addresses. When an instruction addresses a location in the selected working register area, the address bits are concatenated in the following way to form a complete 8-bit address: -- The high-order bit of the 4-bit address selects one of the register pointers ("0" selects RP0, "1" selects RP1). -- The five high-order bits in the register pointer select an 8-byte slice of the register space. -- The three low-order bits of the 4-bit address select one of the eight registers in the slice. As shown in Figure 2-11, the result of this operation is that the five high-order bits from the register pointer are concatenated with the three low-order bits from the instruction address to form the complete address. As long as the address stored in the register pointer remains unchanged, the three bits from the address will always point to an address in the same 8-byte register slice. Figure 2-12 shows a typical example of 4-bit working register addressing. The high-order bit of the instruction "INC R6" is "0", which selects RP0. The five high-order bits stored in RP0 (01110B) are concatenated with the three low-order bits of the instruction's 4-bit address (110B) to produce the register address 76H (01110110B).
2-14
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESS SPACES
RP0 RP1 Selects RP0 or RP1 Address OPCODE
Register pointer provides five high-order bits
4-bit address provides three low-order bits
Together they create an 8-bit register address
Figure 2-11. 4-Bit Working Register Addressing
RP0 01110 000
RP1 01111 000
Selects RP0
01110
110
Register address (76H)
R6 0110
OPCODE 1110 Instruction 'INC R6'
Figure 2-12. 4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example
2-15
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C825A/P825A
8-BIT WORKING REGISTER ADDRESSING You can also use 8-bit working register addressing to access registers in a selected working register area. To initiate 8-bit working register addressing, the upper four bits of the instruction address must contain the value "1100B." This 4-bit value (1100B) indicates that the remaining four bits have the same effect as 4-bit working register addressing. As shown in Figure 2-13, the lower nibble of the 8-bit address is concatenated in much the same way as for 4-bit addressing: Bit 3 selects either RP0 or RP1, which then supplies the five high-order bits of the final address; the three low-order bits of the complete address are provided by the original instruction. Figure 2-14 shows an example of 8-bit working register addressing. The four high-order bits of the instruction address (1100B) specify 8-bit working register addressing. Bit 4 ("1") selects RP1 and the five high-order bits in RP1 (10101B) become the five high-order bits of the register address. The three low-order bits of the register address (011) are provided by the three low-order bits of the 8-bit instruction address. The five address bits from RP1 and the three address bits from the instruction are concatenated to form the complete register address, 0ABH (10101011B).
RP0 RP1 Selects RP0 or RP1 Address These address bits indicate 8-bit working register addressing 8-bit logical address
1
1
0
0
Register pointer provides five high-order bits
Three low-order bits
8-bit physical address
Figure 2-13. 8-Bit Working Register Addressing
2-16
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESS SPACES
RP0 01100 000 Selects RP1
RP1 10101 000
R11 1100 1 011
8-bit address form instruction 'LD R11, R2'
10101
011
Register address (0ABH)
Specifies working register addressing
Figure 2-14. 8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example
2-17
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C825A/P825A
SYSTEM AND USER STACK
The S3C8-series microcontrollers use the system stack for data storage, subroutine calls and returns. The PUSH and POP instructions are used to control system stack operations. The S3C825A architecture supports stack operations in the internal register file. Stack Operations Return addresses for procedure calls, interrupts, and data are stored on the stack. The contents of the PC are saved to stack by a CALL instruction and restored by the RET instruction. When an interrupt occurs, the contents of the PC and the FLAGS register are pushed to the stack. The IRET instruction then pops these values back to their original locations. The stack address value is always decreased by one before a push operation and increased by one after a pop operation. The stack pointer (SP) always points to the stack frame stored on the top of the stack, as shown in Figure 2-15.
High Address
PCL PCL Top of stack PCH PCH Top of stack Flags Stack contents after an interrupt Low Address
Stack contents after a call instruction
Figure 2-15. Stack Operations User-Defined Stacks You can freely define stacks in the internal register file as data storage locations. The instructions PUSHUI, PUSHUD, POPUI, and POPUD support user-defined stack operations. Stack Pointers (SPL, SPH) Register locations D8H and D9H contain the 16-bit stack pointer (SP) that is used for system stack operations. The most significant byte of the SP address, SP15-SP8, is stored in the SPH register (D8H), and the least significant byte, SP7-SP0, is stored in the SPL register (D9H). After a reset, the SP value is undetermined. Because only internal memory space is implemented in the S3C825A, the SPL must be initialized to an 8-bit value in the range 00H-FFH. The SPH register is not needed and can be used as a general-purpose register, if necessary. When the SPL register contains the only stack pointer value (that is, when it points to a system stack in the register file), you can use the SPH register as a general-purpose data register. However, if an overflow or underflow condition occurs as a result of increasing or decreasing the stack address value in the SPL register during normal stack operations, the value in the SPL register will overflow (or underflow) to the SPH register, overwriting any other data that is currently stored there. To avoid overwriting data in the SPH register, you can initialize the SPL value to "FFH" instead of "00H".
2-18
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESS SPACES
+ PROGRAMMING TIP -- Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP
The following example shows you how to perform stack operations in the internal register file using PUSH and POP instructions: LD SPL,#0FFH ; SPL FFH ; (Normally, the SPL is set to 0FFH by the initialization ; routine)
* * *
PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH
* * *
PP RP0 RP1 R3
; ; ; ;
Stack address 0FEH Stack address 0FDH Stack address 0FCH Stack address 0FBH

PP RP0 RP1 R3
POP POP POP POP
R3 RP1 RP0 PP
; ; ; ;
R3 Stack address 0FBH RP1 Stack address 0FCH RP0 Stack address 0FDH PP Stack address 0FEH
2-19
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
2-20
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESSING MODES
3
OVERVIEW
ADDRESSING MODES
Instructions that are stored in program memory are fetched for execution using the program counter. Instructions indicate the operation to be performed and the data to be operated on. Addressing mode is the method used to determine the location of the data operand. The operands specified in SAM88RC instructions may be condition codes, immediate data, or a location in the register file, program memory, or data memory. The S3C8-series instruction set supports seven explicit addressing modes. Not all of these addressing modes are available for each instruction. The seven addressing modes and their symbols are: -- Register (R) -- Indirect Register (IR) -- Indexed (X) -- Direct Address (DA) -- Indirect Address (IA) -- Relative Address (RA) -- Immediate (IM)
3-1
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C825A/P825A
REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (R)
In Register addressing mode (R), the operand value is the content of a specified register or register pair (see Figure 3-1). Working register addressing differs from Register addressing in that it uses a register pointer to specify an 8-byte working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space (see Figure 3-2).
Program Memory 8-bit Register File Address One-Operand Instruction (Example)
Register File
dst OPCODE
Point to One Register in Register File Value used in Instruction Execution
OPERAND
Sample Instruction: DEC CNTR ; Where CNTR is the label of an 8-bit register address
Figure 3-1. Register Addressing
Register File MSB Point to RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1 Selected RP points to start of working register block OPERAND
Program Memory 4-bit Working Register Two-Operand Instruction (Example) 3 LSBs Point to the Working Register (1 of 8)
dst
src
OPCODE
Sample Instruction: ADD R1, R2 ; Where R1 and R2 are registers in the curruntly selected working register area.
Figure 3-2. Working Register Addressing
3-2
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESSING MODES
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (IR)
In Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode, the content of the specified register or register pair is the address of the operand. Depending on the instruction used, the actual address may point to a register in the register file, to program memory (ROM), or to an external memory space (see Figures 3-3 through 3-6). You can use any 8-bit register to indirectly address another register. Any 16-bit register pair can be used to indirectly address another memory location. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations C0H-FFH in set 1 using the Indirect Register addressing mode.
Program Memory 8-bit Register File Address One-Operand Instruction (Example)
Register File
dst OPCODE
Point to One Register in Register File Address of Operand used by Instruction
ADDRESS
Value used in Instruction Execution
OPERAND
Sample Instruction: RL @SHIFT ; Where SHIFT is the label of an 8-bit register address
Figure 3-3. Indirect Register Addressing to Register File
3-3
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C825A/P825A
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
Program Memory Example Instruction References Program Memory REGISTER PAIR Points to Register Pair 16-Bit Address Points to Program Memory
dst OPCODE
Program Memory Sample Instructions: CALL JP @RR2 @RR2
Value used in Instruction
OPERAND
Figure 3-4. Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory
3-4
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESSING MODES
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File MSB Points to RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1 Selected RP points to start fo working register block
Program Memory 4-bit Working Register Address 3 LSBs Point to the Working Register (1 of 8)
~
~
dst
src
OPCODE
ADDRESS
~
Sample Instruction: OR R3, @R6 Value used in Instruction OPERAND
~
Figure 3-5. Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File
3-5
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C825A/P825A
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Concluded)
Register File MSB Points to RP0 or RP1 RP0 or RP1 Selected RP points to start of working register block Next 2-bit Point to Working Register Pair (1 of 4) LSB Selects Register Pair 16-Bit address points to program memory or data memory
Program Memory 4-bit Working Register Address dst src OPCODE
Example Instruction References either Program Memory or Data Memory
Program Memory or Data Memory
Value used in Instruction
OPERAND
Sample Instructions: LDC LDE LDE R5,@RR6 R3,@RR14 @RR4, R8 ; Program memory access ; External data memory access ; External data memory access
Figure 3-6. Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory
3-6
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESSING MODES
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (X)
Indexed (X) addressing mode adds an offset value to a base address during instruction execution in order to calculate the effective operand address (see Figure 3-7). You can use Indexed addressing mode to access locations in the internal register file or in external memory. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations C0H-FFH in set 1 using Indexed addressing mode. In short offset Indexed addressing mode, the 8-bit displacement is treated as a signed integer in the range -128 to +127. This applies to external memory accesses only (see Figure 3-8.) For register file addressing, an 8-bit base address provided by the instruction is added to an 8-bit offset contained in a working register. For external memory accesses, the base address is stored in the working register pair designated in the instruction. The 8-bit or 16-bit offset given in the instruction is then added to that base address (see Figure 3-9). The only instruction that supports Indexed addressing mode for the internal register file is the Load instruction (LD). The LDC and LDE instructions support Indexed addressing mode for internal program memory and for external data memory, when implemented.
Register File
RP0 or RP1
~
Value used in Instruction OPERAND
~
Selected RP points to start of working register block
+
Program Memory Two-Operand Instruction Example Base Address dst/src x OPCODE 3 LSBs Point to One of the Woking Register (1 of 8)
~
INDEX
~
Sample Instruction: LD R0, #BASE[R1] ; Where BASE is an 8-bit immediate value
Figure 3-7. Indexed Addressing to Register File
3-7
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C825A/P825A
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File MSB Points to RP0 or RP1 RP0 or RP1 Selected RP points to start of working register block
~
Program Memory 4-bit Working Register Address OFFSET dst/src x OPCODE NEXT 2 Bits Point to Working Register Pair (1 of 4) Register Pair
~
LSB Selects
+
8-Bits 16-Bits
Program Memory or Data Memory
16-Bit address added to offset
16-Bits Sample Instructions: LDC LDE R4, #04H[RR2] R4,#04H[RR2]
OPERAND
Value used in Instruction
; The values in the program address (RR2 + 04H) are loaded into register R4. ; Identical operation to LDC example, except that external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-8. Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset
3-8
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESSING MODES
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (Concluded)
Register File MSB Points to RP0 or RP1 RP0 or RP1 Selected RP points to start of working register block
Program Memory OFFSET OFFSET dst/src src OPCODE
~
NEXT 2 Bits Point to Working Register Pair Register Pair
~
4-bit Working Register Address
LSB Selects
+
8-Bits 16-Bits
Program Memory or Data Memory
16-Bit address added to offset
16-Bits Sample Instructions: LDC LDE R4, #1000H[RR2] R4,#1000H[RR2]
OPERAND
Value used in Instruction
; The values in the program address (RR2 + 1000H) are loaded into register R4. ; Identical operation to LDC example, except that external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-9. Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory
3-9
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C825A/P825A
DIRECT ADDRESS MODE (DA)
In Direct Address (DA) mode, the instruction provides the operand's 16-bit memory address. Jump (JP) and Call (CALL) instructions use this addressing mode to specify the 16-bit destination address that is loaded into the PC whenever a JP or CALL instruction is executed. The LDC and LDE instructions can use Direct Address mode to specify the source or destination address for Load operations to program memory (LDC) or to external data memory (LDE), if implemented.
Program or Data Memory
Program Memory
Memory Address Used
Upper Address Byte Lower Address Byte dst/src "0" or "1" OPCODE
LSB Selects Program Memory or Data Memory: "0" = Program Memory "1" = Data Memory
Sample Instructions: LDC LDE R5,1234H R5,1234H ; ; The values in the program address (1234H) are loaded into register R5. Identical operation to LDC example, except that external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-10. Direct Addressing for Load Instructions
3-10
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESSING MODES
DIRECT ADDRESS MODE (Continued)
Program Memory
Next OPCODE
Memory Address Used Upper Address Byte Lower Address Byte OPCODE
Sample Instructions: JP CALL C,JOB1 DISPLAY ; ; Where JOB1 is a 16-bit immediate address Where DISPLAY is a 16-bit immediate address
Figure 3-11. Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions
3-11
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C825A/P825A
INDIRECT ADDRESS MODE (IA)
In Indirect Address (IA) mode, the instruction specifies an address located in the lowest 256 bytes of the program memory. The selected pair of memory locations contains the actual address of the next instruction to be executed. Only the CALL instruction can use the Indirect Address mode. Because the Indirect Address mode assumes that the operand is located in the lowest 256 bytes of program memory, only an 8-bit address is supplied in the instruction; the upper bytes of the destination address are assumed to be all zeros.
Program Memory
Next Instruction
LSB Must be Zero Current Instruction dst OPCODE
Lower Address Byte Upper Address Byte
Program Memory Locations 0-255
Sample Instruction: CALL #40H ; The 16-bit value in program memory addresses 40H and 41H is the subroutine start address.
Figure 3-12. Indirect Addressing
3-12
S3C825A/P825A
ADDRESSING MODES
RELATIVE ADDRESS MODE (RA)
In Relative Address (RA) mode, a twos-complement signed displacement between - 128 and + 127 is specified in the instruction. The displacement value is then added to the current PC value. The result is the address of the next instruction to be executed. Before this addition occurs, the PC contains the address of the instruction immediately following the current instruction. Several program control instructions use the Relative Address mode to perform conditional jumps. The instructions that support RA addressing are BTJRF, BTJRT, DJNZ, CPIJE, CPIJNE, and JR.
Program Memory
Next OPCODE Program Memory Address Used
Current Instruction
Displacement OPCODE
Current PC Value Signed Displacement Value
+
Sample Instructions: JR ULT,$+OFFSET ; Where OFFSET is a value in the range +127 to -128
Figure 3-13. Relative Addressing
3-13
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C825A/P825A
IMMEDIATE MODE (IM)
In Immediate (IM) addressing mode, the operand value used in the instruction is the value supplied in the operand field itself. The operand may be one byte or one word in length, depending on the instruction used. Immediate addressing mode is useful for loading constant values into registers.
Program Memory OPERAND OPCODE
(The Operand value is in the instruction) Sample Instruction: LD R0,#0AAH
Figure 3-14. Immediate Addressing
3-14
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
4
OVERVIEW
CONTROL REGISTERS
In this chapter, detailed descriptions of the S3C825A control registers are presented in an easy-to-read format. You can use this chapter as a quick-reference source when writing application programs. Figure 4-1 illustrates the important features of the standard register description format. Control register descriptions are arranged in alphabetical order according to register mnemonic. More detailed information about control registers is presented in the context of the specific peripheral hardware descriptions in Part II of this manual. Data and counter registers are not described in detail in this reference chapter. More information about all of the registers used by a specific peripheral is presented in the corresponding peripheral descriptions in Part II of this manual. The locations and read/write characteristics of all mapped registers in the S3C825A register file are listed in Table 4-1. The hardware reset value for each mapped register is described in Chapter 8, "RESET and PowerDown." Table 4-1. Set 1 Registers (INTPND/STPCON/OSCCON are in bank 0 of set 1) Register Name Mnemonic Address Decimal Interrupt pending register STOP control register Oscillator control register Basic timer control register System clock control register System flags register Register pointer 0 Register pointer 1 Stack pointer (high byte) Stack pointer (low byte) Instruction pointer (high byte) Instruction pointer (low byte) Interrupt request register Interrupt mask register System mode register Register page pointer INTPND STPCON OSCCON BTCON CLKCON FLAGS RP0 RP1 SPH SPL IPH IPL IRQ IMR SYM PP 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 Hex D0H D1H D2H D3H D4H D5H D6H D7H D8H D9H DAH DBH DCH DDH DEH DFH R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 - 0 - 0 0 x 1 1 x x x x 0 x 0 0 RESET Values (bit) 6 - 0 - 0 0 x 1 1 x x x x 0 x - 0 5 0 0 - 0 0 x 0 0 x x x x 0 x - 0 4 0 0 - 0 0 x 0 0 x x x x 0 x x 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 1 x x x x 0 x x 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 x - - x x x x 0 x x 0 1 0 0 - 0 0 0 - - x x x x 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - x x x x 0 x 0 0
4-1
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
Table 4-2. Set 1, Bank 0 Registers Register Name SIO Control Register SIO Data Register SIO Prescaler Register Timer 0 Counter Register Timer 0 Data Register Timer 0 Control Register Timer B Counter Register Timer A Counter Register Timer B Data Register Timer A Data Register Timer B Control Register Timer 1/A Control Register Timer 2 Counter Register Timer 2 Data Register Timer 2 Control Register A/D Converter Control Register
A/D Converter Data Register (high byte) A/D Converter Data Register (low byte)
Mnemonic SIOCON SIODATA SIOPS T0CNT T0DATA T0CON TBCNT TACNT TBDATA TADATA TBCON TACON T2CNT T2DATA T2CON ADCON ADDATAH ADDATAL LCON LMOD T3CNTH T3CNTL T3DATAH T3DATAL T3CON UDATA UARTCON BRDATA BTCNT IPR
Address Decimal 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 253 255 Hex E0H E1H E2H E3H E4H E5H E6H E7H E8H E9H EAH EBH ECH EDH EEH EFH F0H F1H F2H F3H F4H F5H F6H F7H F8H F9H FAH FBH FDH FFH
R/W 7 R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 - 0 0 1 0 - x - 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x
RESETB Value(bit) 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 - 0 0 1 0 - x - 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x - - - 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 4 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x - - - 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 3 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x - 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x - 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x x 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x x 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x
LCD Control Register LCD Mode Register Timer 3 Counter (high byte) Timer 3 Counter (low byte)
Timer 3 Data Register (high byte)
Timer 3 Data Register (low byte) Timer 3 Control Register UART data register UART control register UART Baud Rate data register Basic Timer Counter Interrupt Priority Register
Location FCH is not mapped. Location FEH is not mapped.
4-2
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
Table 4-3. Set 1, Bank 1 Registers Register Name Port 2 Control Register(High Byte) Port 2 Control Register(Low Byte)
Port 2 Pull-up Resistors enable Register
Mnemonic P2CONH P2CONL P2PUR P2INT P3CONH P3CONL P3PUR P4EDGE P4CONH P4CONL P4INT P4PND P5CONH P5CONL P5PUR WTCON P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 PG0CON PG1CON
Address Decimal 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 251 252 Hex E0H E1H E2H E3H E4H E5H E6H E7H E8H E9H EAH EBH ECH EDH EEH EFH F0H F1H F2H F3H F4H F5H F6H F7H F8H F9H FAH
R/W 7 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RESETB Value(bit) 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Port 2 Interrupt Control Register Port 3 Control Register(High Byte) Port 3 Control Register(Low Byte)
Port 3 Pull-up Resistors enable Register Port 4 Interrupt Edge Selection Register
Port 4 Control Register(High Byte) Port 4 Control Register(Low Byte) Port 4 Interrupt Control Register Port 4 Interrupt Pending Register Port 5 Control Register(High Byte) Port 5 Control Register(Low Byte)
Port 5 Pull-up Resistors enable Register
Watch timer control register Port 0 Data Register Port 1 Data Register Port 2 Data Register Port 3 Data Register Port 4 Data Register Port 5 Data Register Port 6 Data Register Port 7 Data Register Port 8 Data Register Port Group 0 Control Register Port Group 1 Control Register
Locations FBH-FFH are not mapped.
4-3
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
Bit number(s) that is/are appended to the register name for bit addressing Register ID Register name
Name of individual bit or related bits Register address (hexadecimal)
Register location in the internal register file
FLAGS - System Flags Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Bit Addressing Mode .7 Carry Flag (C) 0 0 .6 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W
D5H
.2 x R/W .1 x R/W
Set 1
.0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only
Operation does not generate a carry or borrow condition Operation generates carry-out or borrow into high-order bit 7
Zero Flag (Z) 0 0 Operation result is a non-zero value Operation result is zero
.5 Sign Flag (S) 0 0 Operation generates positive number (MSB = "0") Operation generates negative number (MSB = "1")
R = Read-only W = Write-only R/W = Read/write '-' = Not used Type of addressing that must be used to address the bit (1-bit, 4-bit, or 8-bit)
Description of the effect of specific bit settings
Bit number: MSB = Bit 7 LSB = Bit 0 RESET value notation: '-' = Not used 'x' = Undetermined value '0' = Logic zero '1' = Logic one
Figure 4-1. Register Description Format
4-4
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
ADCON -- A/D Converter Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.6 .5-.4 .7 - - .6 - - .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R
EFH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Not used for the S3C825A A/D Input Pin Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 AD0 (P3.0) AD1 (P3.1) AD2 (P3.2) AD3 (P3.3)
.3
End-of-Conversion Bit (read-only) 0 1 Conversion not complete Conversion complete
.2-.1
Clock Source Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 fxx/16 fxx/8 fxx/4 fxx
.0
Start or Enable Bit 0 1 Disable operation Start operation (automatically disable operation after conversion complete).
4-5
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
BTCON -- Basic Timer Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.4 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
D3H
.2 0 R/W .1 0 R/W
Set 1
.0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Watchdog Timer Function Disable Code (for System Reset) 1 0 1 0 Disable watchdog timer function Enable watchdog timer function Others
.3-.2
Basic Timer Input Clock Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 fxx/4096 (3) fxx/1024 fxx/128 fxx/16
.1
Basic Timer Counter Clear Bit (1) 0 1 No effect Clear the basic timer counter value
.0
Clock Frequency Divider Clear Bit for all Timers (2) 0 1 No effect Clear both clock frequency dividers
NOTES: 1. When you write a "1" to BTCON.1, the basic timer counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write operation, the BTCON.1 value is automatically cleared to "0". 2. When you write a "1" to BTCON.0, the corresponding frequency divider is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write operation, the BTCON.0 value is automatically cleared to "0". 3. The fxx is selected clock for system.
4-6
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
CLKCON -- System Clock Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 - .5 0 - .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
D4H
.2 0 - .1 0 -
Set 1
.0 0 -
Register addressing mode only Oscillator IRQ Wake-up Function Bit 0 1 Enable IRQ for main wake-up in power down mode Disable IRQ for main wake-up in power down mode
.6-.5 .4-.3
Not used for the S3C825A. CPU Clock (System Clock) Selection Bits (note) 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 fxx/16 fxx/8 fxx/2 fxx
.2-.0
Not used for the S3C825A.
NOTE: After a reset, the slowest clock (divided by 16) is selected as the system clock. To select faster clock speeds, load the appropriate values to CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4.
4-7
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
FLAGS -- System Flags Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W
D5H
.2 x R/W .1 0 R
Set 1
.0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Carry Flag (C) 0 1 Operation does not generate a carry or borrow condition Operation generates a carry-out or borrow into high-order bit 7
.6
Zero Flag (Z) 0 1 Operation result is a non-zero value Operation result is zero
.5
Sign Flag (S) 0 1 Operation generates a positive number (MSB = "0") Operation generates a negative number (MSB = "1")
.4
Overflow Flag (V) 0 1 Operation result is +127 or -128 Operation result is > +127 or < -128
.3
Decimal Adjust Flag (D) 0 1 Add operation completed Subtraction operation completed
.2
Half-Carry Flag (H) 0 1 No carry-out of bit 3 or no borrow into bit 3 by addition or subtraction Addition generated carry-out of bit 3 or subtraction generated borrow into bit 3
.1
Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FIS) 0 1 Interrupt return (IRET) in progress (when read) Fast interrupt service routine in progress (when read)
.0
Bank Address Selection Flag (BA) 0 1 Bank 0 is selected Bank 1 is selected
4-8
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
IMR -- Interrupt Mask Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W
DDH
.2 x R/W .1 x R/W
Set 1
.0 x R/W
Register addressing mode only Interrupt Level 7 (IRQ7) Enable Bit; P4.0-P4.3 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask)
.6
Interrupt Level 6 (IRQ6) Enable Bit; P4.4-P4.7 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask)
.5
Interrupt Level 5 (IRQ5) Enable Bit; P2.4-P2.7 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask)
.4
Interrupt Level 4 (IRQ4) Enable Bit; Watch Timer 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask)
.3
Interrupt Level 3 (IRQ3) Enable Bit; SIO, UART Transmit, UART Receive 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask)
.2
Interrupt Level 2 (IRQ2) Enable Bit;Timer 2, Timer 3 match/capture or overflow 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask)
.1
Interrupt Level 1 (IRQ1) Enable Bit; Timer B, Timer 1/A 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask)
.0
Interrupt Level 0 (IRQ0) Enable Bit; Timer 0 Match/Capture or Overflow 0 1 Disable (mask) Enable (unmask)
NOTE: When an interrupt level is masked, any interrupt requests that may be issued are not recognized by the CPU.
4-9
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
INTPND -- Interrupt Pending Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.6 .5 .7 - - .6 - - .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
D0H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Not used for the S3C825A Rx Interrupt Pending Bit (for UART) 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending (when read), pending bit clear (when write 0) Interrupt request is pending
.4
Tx Interrupt Pending Bit (for UART) 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending (when read), pending bit clear (when write 0) Interrupt request is pending
.3
Timer 3 Match/Capture Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending (when read), pending bit clear (when write 0) Interrupt request is pending
.2
Timer 3 Overflow Interrupt Pending bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending (when read), pending bit clear (when write 0) Interrupt request is pending
.1
Timer 0 Match/Capture Interrupt Pending Bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending (when read), pending bit clear (when write 0) Interrupt request is pending
.0
Timer 0 Overflow Interrupt Pending bit 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending (when read), pending bit clear (when write 0) Interrupt request is pending
4-10
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
IPH -- Instruction Pointer (High Byte)
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.0 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W
DAH
.2 x R/W .1 x R/W
Set 1
.0 x R/W
Register addressing mode only Instruction Pointer Address (High Byte) The high-byte instruction pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit instruction pointer address (IP15-IP8). The lower byte of the IP address is located in the IPL register (DBH).
IPL -- Instruction Pointer (Low Byte)
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.0 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W
DBH
.2 x R/W .1 x R/W
Set 1
.0 x R/W
Register addressing mode only Instruction Pointer Address (Low Byte) The low-byte instruction pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit instruction pointer address (IP7-IP0). The upper byte of the IP address is located in the IPH register (DAH).
4-11
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
IPR -- Interrupt Priority Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7, .4, and .1 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W
FFH
.2 x R/W
Set 1, Bank 0
.1 x R/W .0 x R/W
Register addressing mode only Priority Control Bits for Interrupt Groups A, B, and C (note) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Group priority undefined B>C>A A>B>C B>A>C C>A>B C>B>A A>C>B Group priority undefined
.6
Interrupt Subgroup C Priority Control Bit 0 1 IRQ6 > IRQ7 IRQ7 > IRQ6
.5
Interrupt Group C Priority Control Bit 0 1 IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7) (IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5
.3
Interrupt Subgroup B Priority Control Bit 0 1 IRQ3 > IRQ4 IRQ4 > IRQ3
.2
Interrupt Group B Priority Control Bit 0 1 IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4) (IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2
.0
Interrupt Group A Priority Control Bit 0 1 IRQ0 > IRQ1 IRQ1 > IRQ0
NOTE: Interrupt Group A - IRQ0, IRQ1 Interrupt Group B - IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4 Interrupt Group C - IRQ5, IRQ6, IRQ7
4-12
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
IRQ -- Interrupt Request Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R .6 0 R .5 0 R .4 0 R .3 0 R
DCH
.2 0 R .1 0 R
Set 1
.0 0 R
Register addressing mode only Level 7 (IRQ7) Request Pending Bit; External Interrupt P4.0-P4.3 0 1 Not pending Pending
.6
Level 6 (IRQ6) Request Pending Bit; External Interrupt P4.4-P4.7 0 1 Not pending Pending
.5
Level 5 (IRQ5) Request Pending Bit; External Interrupt P2.4-P2.7 0 1 Not pending Pending
.4
Level 4 (IRQ4) Request Pending Bit; Watch Timer 0 1 Not pending Pending
.3
Level 3 (IRQ3) Request Pending Bit; SIO, UART Transmit, UART Receive 0 1 Not pending Pending
.2
Level 2 (IRQ2) Request Pending Bit; Timer 2, Timer 3 Match/Capture or Overflow 0 1 Not pending Pending
.1
Level 1 (IRQ1) Request Pending Bit; Timer B, Timer 1/A 0 1 Not pending Pending
.0
Level 0 (IRQ0) Request Pending Bit; Timer 0 Match/Capture or Overflow 0 1 Not pending Pending
4-13
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
LCON -- LCD Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 and .6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 - - .4 - - .3 0 R/W
F2H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only LCD Display Control Bits 0 0 1 0 1 1 Display off, P-Tr off Normal display (using VLC1 with external voltage), P-Tr off Normal display (using VLC1 with internal voltage), P-Tr on
.5 and .4 .3 and .2
Not used for the S3C825A. LCD Duty and Bias Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1/3 duty, 1/3 bias; COM0-COM2/SEG0-SEG31 1/4 duty, 1/3 bias; COM0-COM3/SEG0-SEG31 1/8 duty, 1/4 bias; COM0-COM7/SEG4-SEG31 1/8 duty, 1/5 bias; COM0-COM7/SEG4-SEG31
.1 and .0
LCD Clock Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 fw/27 (256 Hz when fw is 32.768 kHz) fw/26 (512 Hz when fw is 32.768 kHz) fw/25 (1,024 Hz when fw is 32.768 kHz) fw/24 (2,048 Hz when fw is 32.768 kHz)
4-14
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
LMOD -- LCD Mode Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.4 .3-.0 .7 - - .6 - - .5 - - .4 - - .3 0 R/W
F3H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Not used for the S3C825A. LCD Port Selection Bit P6.0P6.3
COM 0-3
P6.4P6.7
COM4-7/ SEG0-3
P7.0P7.3
SEG 4-7
P7.4P7.7
SEG 8-11
P8.0P8.3
SEG 12-15
P0.0P0.3
SEG 16-19
P0.4P0.7
SEG 20-23
P1.0P1.3
SEG 24-27
P1.4P1.7
SEG 28-31
0000
Port
Port
COM/SEG COM/SEG COM/SEG COM/SEG COM/SEG COM/SEG COM/SEG COM/SEG
Port Port SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG
Port Port Port SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG
Port Port Port Port SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG
Port Port Port Port Port SEG SEG SEG SEG
Port Port Port Port Port Port SEG SEG SEG
Port Port Port Port Port Port Port SEG SEG
Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port SEG
0 0 0 1 COM 0 0 1 0 COM 0 0 1 1 COM 0 1 0 0 COM 0 1 0 1 COM 0 1 1 0 COM 0 1 1 1 COM 1 0 0 0 COM
NOTE: The SEG0-SEG3 or COM4-COM7 signals are controlled by LCON.3-.2.
4-15
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
OSCCON -- Oscillator Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write .7-.4 .3 .7 - - .6 - - .5 - - .4 - - .3 0 R/W
D2H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 0
.1 - - .0 0 R/W
Not used for S3C825A Main Oscillator Control Bit 0 1 Main oscillator RUN Main oscillator STOP
.2
Sub Oscillator Control Bit 0 1 Sub oscillator RUN Sub oscillator STOP
.1 .0
Not used for S3C825A System Clock Selection Bit 0 1 Select main oscillator for system clock Select sub oscillator for system clock
4-16
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
P2CONH -- Port 2 Control Register (High Byte)
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E0H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P2.7/INT3/TBOUT 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode; interrupt on falling edge Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (TBOUT) Output mode, push-pull
.5-.4
P2.6/INT2/TAOUT 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode; interrupt on falling edge Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (TAOUT) Output mode, push-pull
.3-.2
P2.5/INT1/T1CLK 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (T1CLK); interrupt on falling edge Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull
.1-.0
P2.4/INT0/T0CLK 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (T0CLK); interrupt on falling edge Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull
4-17
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
P2CONL -- Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte)
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E1H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P2.3/T2OUT 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (T2OUT) Output mode, push-pull
.5-.4
P2.2/T2CLK 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (T2CLK) Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull
.3-.2
P2.1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull
.1-.0
P2.0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull
4-18
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
P2PUR -- Port 2 Pull-up Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E2H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P2.7 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.6
P2.6 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.5
P2.5 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.4
P2.4 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.3
P2.3 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.2
P2.2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.1
P2.1 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.0
P2.0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
4-19
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
P2INT --
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write
Port 2 Interrupt Control Register
.7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E3H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Addressing Mode .7
Register addressing mode only Port 2 Interrupt Request Pending Bit (P2.7/INT3) 0 No interrupt request pending 0 Clear pending bit (when write) 1 Interrupt request is pending Interrupt Control Settings (P2.7/INT3) 0 Disable interrupt on P2.7 1 Enable interrupt at falling edge on P2.7 Port 2 Interrupt Request Pending Bit (P2.6/INT2) 0 No interrupt request pending 0 Clear pending bit (when write) 1 Interrupt request is pending Interrupt Control Settings (P2.6/INT2) 0 Disable interrupt on P2.6 1 Enable interrupt at falling edge on P2.6 Port 2 Interrupt Request Pending Bit (P2.5/INT1) 0 No interrupt request pending 0 Clear pending bit (when write) 1 Interrupt request is pending Interrupt Control Settings (P2.5/INT1) 0 Disable interrupt on P2.5 1 Enable interrupt at falling edge on P2.5 Port 2 Interrupt Request Pending Bit (P2.4/INT0) 0 No interrupt request pending 0 Clear pending bit (when write) 1 Interrupt request is pending Interrupt Control Settings (P2.4/INT0) 0 Disable interrupt on P2.4 1 Enable interrupt at falling edge on P2.4
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
4-20
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
P3CONH -- Port 3 Control Register (High Byte)
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E4H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P3.7/T0OUT/T0PWM/T0CAP 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (T0CAP) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (T0OUT/T0PWM) Output mode, push-pull
.5-.4
P3.6/T3OUT/T3PWM/T3CAP 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (T3CAP) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (T3OUT/T3PWM) Output mode, push-pull
.3-.2
P3.5/T3CLK 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode(T3CLK) Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull
.1-.0
P3.4 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull
4-21
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
P3CONL -- Port 3 Control Register (Low Byte)
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E5H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P3.3/AD3 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull
.5-.4
P3.2/AD2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull
.3-.2
P3.1/AD1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull
.1-.0
P3.0/AD0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (ADC mode) Output mode, push-pull
4-22
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
P3PUR -- Port 3 Pull-up Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E6H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P3.7 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 Pull-up disable 1 Pull-up enable
.6
P3.6 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 Pull-up disable 1 Pull-up enable
.5
P3.5 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 Pull-up disable 1 Pull-up enable
.4
P3.4 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 Pull-up disable 1 Pull-up enable
.3
P3.3 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 Pull-up disable 1 Pull-up enable
.2
P3.2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.1
P3.1 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.0
P3.0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
4-23
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
P4CONH --
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 and .6
Port 4 Control Register (High Byte)
.7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E8H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P4.7/INT11 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input, pull-up mode Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.5 and .4
P4.6/INT10 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input, pull-up mode Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.3 and .2
P4.5/INT9 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input, pull-up mode Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.1 and .0
P4.4/INT8 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input, pull-up mode Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
NOTE: Pins configured as input can be used as interrupt input with noise filter.
4-24
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
P4CONL --
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 and .6
Port 4 Control Register (Low Byte)
.7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E9H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P4.3/INT7 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input, pull-up mode Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.5 and .4
P4.2/INT6 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input, pull-up mode Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.3 and .2
P4.1/INT5 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input, pull-up mode Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.1 and .0
P4.0/INT4 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input, pull-up mode Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
NOTE: Pins configured as input can be used as interrupt input with noise filter.
4-25
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
P4EDGE --
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7
Port 4 Interrupt Edge Selection Register
.7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E7H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P4.7 External Interrupt (INT11) State Bit 0 1 Falling edge detection Rising edge detection
.6
P4.6 External Interrupt (INT10) State Bit 0 1 Falling edge detection Rising edge detection
.5
P4.5 External Interrupt (INT9) State Bit 0 1 Falling edge detection Rising edge detection
.4
P4.4 External Interrupt (INT8) State Bit 0 1 Falling edge detection Rising edge detection
.3
P4.3 External Interrupt (INT7) State Bit 0 1 Falling edge detection Rising edge detection
.2
P4.2 External Interrupt (INT6) State Bit 0 1 Falling edge detection Rising edge detection
.1
P4.1 External Interrupt (INT5) State Bit 0 1 Falling edge detection Rising edge detection
.0
P4.0 External Interrupt (INT4) State Bit 0 1 Falling edge detection Rising edge detection
4-26
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
P4INT --
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write
Port 4 Interrupt Control Register
.7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
EAH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Addressing Mode .7
Register addressing mode only P4.7 External Interrupt (INT11) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.6
P4.6 External Interrupt (INT10) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.5
P4.5 External Interrupt (INT9) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.4
P4.4 External Interrupt (INT8) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.3
P4.3 External Interrupt (INT7) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.2
P4.2 External Interrupt (INT6) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.1
P4.1 External Interrupt (INT5) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.0
P4.0 External Interrupt (INT4) Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
4-27
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
P4PND --
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7
Port 4 Interrupt Pending Register
.7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
EBH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P4.7 External Interrupt (INT11) Pending Flag 0 1 No interrupt request pending (When read), Clear pending bit (when write) P4.7 interrupt request is pending (when read)
.6
P4.6 External Interrupt (INT10) Pending Flag 0 1 No interrupt request pending (When read), Clear pending bit (when write) P4.6 interrupt request is pending (when read)
.5
P4.5 External Interrupt (INT9) Pending Flag 0 1 No interrupt request pending (When read), Clear pending bit (when write) P4.5 interrupt request is pending (when read)
.4
P4.4 External Interrupt (INT8) Pending Flag 0 1 No interrupt request pending (When read), Clear pending bit (when write) P4.4 interrupt request is pending (when read)
.3
P4.3 External Interrupt (INT7) Pending Flag 0 1 No interrupt request pending (When read), Clear pending bit (when write) P4.3 interrupt request is pending (when read)
.2
P4.2 External Interrupt (INT6) Pending Flag 0 1 No interrupt request pending (When read), Clear pending bit (when write) P4.2 interrupt request is pending (when read)
.1
P4.1 External Interrupt (INT5) Pending Flag 0 1 No interrupt request pending (When read), Clear pending bit (when write) P4.1 interrupt request is pending (when read)
.0
P4.0 External Interrupt (INT4) Pending Flag 0 1 No interrupt request pending (When read), Clear pending bit (when write) P4.0 interrupt request is pending (when read)
NOTE: Writing a "1" to an interrupt pending flag (P4PND.0-.7) has no effect.
4-28
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
P5CONH -- Port 5 Control Register (High Byte)
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
ECH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only TXD output control bit 0 1 Disable TXD output at P5.5 Enable TXD output at P5.5
.6
RXD output control bit 0 1 Disable RXD output at P5.4 Enable RXD output at P5.4
.5-.4
P5.6 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull
.3-.2
P5.5/TXD 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain (TXD output depends on P5CONH.7) Not available Output mode, push-pull (TXD output depends on P5CONH.7)
.1-.0
P5.4/RXD 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (RXD) Output mode, open-drain (RXD output depends on P5CONH.6) Not available Output mode, push-pull (RXD output depends on P5CONH.6)
4-29
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
P5CONL -- Port 5 Control Register (Low Byte)
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
EDH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P5.3/BUZ 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (BUZ) Output mode, push-pull
.5-.4
P5.2/SO 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (SO) Output mode, push-pull
.3-.2
P5.1/SI 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (SI) Output mode, open-drain Not available Output mode, push-pull
.1-.0
P5.0/SCK 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode (SCK) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (SCK out) Output mode, push-pull
4-30
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
P5PUR -- Port 5 Pull-up Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
EEH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Not used for the S3C825A P5.6 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.5
P5.5 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.4
P5.4 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.3
P5.3 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.2
P5.2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.1
P5.1 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
.0
P5.0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit 0 1 Pull-up disable Pull-up enable
4-31
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
PG0CON -- Port Group 0 Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
F9H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P1.4-1.7/SEG28-31 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.5-.4
P1.0-1.3/SEG24-27 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.3-.2
P0.4-0.7/SEG20-23 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.1-.0
P0.0-0.3/SEG16-19 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
4-32
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
PG1CON -- Port Group 1 Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.6 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
FAH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only P8.0-P8.3/SEG12-15 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.5-.4
P7.4-P7.7/SEG8-11 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.3-.2
P7.0-P7.3/SEG4-7 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
.1-.0
P6.0-P6.3/COM0-3 and P6.4-P6.7/COM4-7/SEG0-3 Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Open-drain output mode Push-pull output mode
4-33
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
PP -- Register Page Pointer
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.4 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
DFH
.2 0 R/W .1 0 R/W
Set 1
.0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Destination Register Page Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Destination: page 0 Destination: page 1 Destination: page 2 Destination: page 3 Destination: page 4 Destination: page 5 Destination: page 6 Destination: page 7
.3 - .0
Source Register Page Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Source: page 0 Source: page 1 Source: page 2 Source: page 3 Source: page 4 Source: page 5 Source: page 6 Source: page 7
NOTE: In the S3C825A microcontroller, the internal register file is configured as eight pages (Pages 0-7). The pages 0-6 are used for general purpose register file, and page 4 is used for LCD data register or general purpose registers.
4-34
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
RP0 -- Register Pointer 0
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.3 .7 1 R/W .6 1 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
D6H
.2 - - .1 - -
Set 1
.0 - -
Register addressing only Register Pointer 0 Address Value Register pointer 0 can independently point to one of the 256-byte working register areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select two 8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset, RP0 points to address C0H in register set 1, selecting the 8-byte working register slice C0H-C7H.
.2-.0
Not used for the S3C825A
RP1 -- Register Pointer 1
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 - .3 .7 1 R/W .6 1 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 1 R/W
D7H
.2 - - .1 - -
Set 1
.0 - -
Register addressing only Register Pointer 1 Address Value Register pointer 1 can independently point to one of the 256-byte working register areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select two 8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset, RP1 points to address C8H in register set 1, selecting the 8-byte working register slice C8H-CFH.
.2 - .0
Not used for the S3C825A
4-35
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
SIOCON -- SIO Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E0H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only SIO Shift Clock Selection Bit 0 1 Internal clock (P.S clock) External clock (SCK)
.6
Data Direction Control Bit 0 1 MSB-first mode LSB-first mode
.5
SIO Mode Selection Bit 0 1 Receive-only mode Transmit/receive mode
.4
Shift Clock Edge Selection Bit 0 1 Tx at falling edges, Rx at rising edges Tx at rising edges, Rx at falling edges
.3
SIO Counter Clear and Shift Start Bit 0 1 No action Clear 3-bit counter and start shifting
.2
SIO Shift Operation Enable Bit 0 1 Disable shifter and clock counter Enable shifter and clock counter
.1
SIO Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable SIO Interrupt Enable SIO Interrupt
.0
SIO Interrupt Pending Bit 0 0 1 No interrupt pending Clear pending condition (when write) Interrupt is pending
4-36
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
SPH -- Stack Pointer (High Byte)
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.0 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W
D8H
.2 x R/W .1 x R/W
Set 1
.0 x R/W
Register addressing mode only Stack Pointer Address (High Byte) The high-byte stack pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit stack pointer address (SP15-SP8). The lower byte of the stack pointer value is located in register SPL (D9H). The SP value is undefined following a reset.
SPL -- Stack Pointer (Low Byte)
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.0 .7 x R/W .6 x R/W .5 x R/W .4 x R/W .3 x R/W
D9H
.2 x R/W .1 x R/W
Set 1
.0 x R/W
Register addressing mode only Stack Pointer Address (Low Byte) The low-byte stack pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit stack pointer address (SP7-SP0). The upper byte of the stack pointer value is located in register SPH (D8H). The SP value is undefined following a reset.
4-37
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
STPCON -- Stop Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.0 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
D1H
.2 0 R/W .1 0 R/W
Set 1
.0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only STOP Control Bits 10100101 Other values Enable stop instruction Disable stop instruction
NOTE: Before execute the STOP instruction, set this STPCON register as "10100101b". Otherwise the STOP instruction will not execute as well as reset will be generated.
4-38
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
SYM -- System Mode Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .6-.5 .4-.2 .7 0 R/W .6 - - .5 - - .4 x R/W .3 x R/W
DEH
.2 x R/W .1 0 R/W
Set 1
.0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Not used, But you must keep "0" Not used for the S3C825A Fast Interrupt Level Selection Bits (1) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7
.1
Fast Interrupt Enable Bit (2) 0 1 Disable fast interrupt processing Enable fast interrupt processing
.0
Global Interrupt Enable Bit (3) 0 1 Disable all interrupt processing Enable all interrupt processing
NOTES: 1. You can select only one interrupt level at a time for fast interrupt processing. 2. Setting SYM.1 to "1" enables fast interrupt processing for the interrupt level currently selected by SYM.2-SYM.4. 3. Following a reset, you must enable global interrupt processing by executing an EI instruction (not by writing a "1" to SYM.0).
4-39
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
T0CON -- Timer 0 Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.5 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
E5H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Timer 0 Input Clock Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 fxx/1024 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx External clock (T0CLK) falling edge External clock (T0CLK) rising edge Counter stop
.4-.3
Timer 0 Operating Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Interval mode Capture mode (capture on rising edge, counter running, OVF can occur) Capture mode (capture on falling edge, counter running, OVF can occur) PWM mode (OVF & match interrupt can occur)
.2
Timer 0 Counter Clear Bit (note) 0 1 No effect Clear the timer 0 counter (when write)
.1
Timer 0 Match/Capture Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.0
Timer 0 Overflow Interrupt Enable 0 1 Disable overflow interrupt Enable overflow interrupt
NOTE: When you write a "1" to T0CON.2, the timer 0 counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write operation, the T0CON.2 value is automatically cleared to "0".
4-40
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
TACON -- Timer 1/A Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
EBH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Timer 1 Operating Mode Selection Bit 0 1 Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A/B) One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 1)
.6-.4
Timer 1/A Clock Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx External clock (T1CLK) rising edge
.3
Timer 1/A Counter Clear Bit (NOTE) 0 1 No effect Clear the timer 1/A counter (when write)
.2
Timer 1/A Counter Run Enable Bit 0 1 Disable Counter Running Enable Counter Running
.1
Timer 1/A Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.0
Timer 1/A Interrupt Pending Bit 0 0 1 No interrupt pending (when read) Clear pending bit (when write) Interrupt is pending (when read)
NOTE: When you write a "1" to TACON.3, the Timer 1/A counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write operation, the TACON.3 value is automatically cleared to "0".
4-41
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
TBCON --
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 and .6 .5 and .4
Timer B Control Register
.7 - - .6 - - .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
EAH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Not used for the S3C825A Timer B Clock Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx
.3
Timer B Counter Clear Bit (NOTE) 0 1 No effect Clear the timer B counter (when write)
.2
Timer B Counter Run Enable Bit 0 1 Disable Counter Running Enable Counter Running
.1
Timer B Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.0
Timer B Interrupt Pending Bit 0 0 1 No interrupt pending (when read) Clear pending bit (when write) Interrupt is pending (when read)
NOTE: When you write a "1" to TBCON.3, the Timer B counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write operation, the TBCON.3 value is automatically cleared to "0".
4-42
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
T2CON -- Timer 2 Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.5 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
EEH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank 0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Timer 2 Input Clock Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx External clock (T2CLK) input
.4 .3
Not used for the S3C825A Timer 2 Counter Clear Bit (Note) 0 1 No effect Clear the timer 2 counter (when write)
.2
Timer 2 Counter Enable Bit 0 1 Disable counting operation Enable counting operation
.1
Timer 2 Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable timer 2 interrupt Enable timer 2 interrupt
.0
Timer 2 Interrupt Pending Bit 0 0 1 No timer 2 interrupt pending (when read) Clear timer 2 interrupt pending bit (when write) T2 interrupt is pending
NOTE: When you write a "1" to T2CON.3, the timer 2 counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write operation, the T2CON.3 value is automatically cleared to "0".
4-43
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
T3CON -- Timer 3 Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write Addressing Mode .7-.5 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
F8H
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Register addressing mode only Timer 3 Input Clock Selection Bits 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 fxx/1024 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx External clock (T3CLK) falling edge External clock (T3CLK) rising edge Counter stop
.4 - .3
Timer 3 Operating Mode Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Interval mode Capture mode (capture on rising edge, counter running, OVF can occur) Capture mode (capture on falling edge, counter running, OVF can occur) PWM mode (OVF & match interrupt can occur)
.2
Timer 3 Counter Clear Bit (NOTE) 0 1 No effect Clear the timer 3 counter (when write)
.1
Timer 3 match/capture interrupt enable bit 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
.0
Timer 3 overflow interrupt enable 0 1 Disable overflow interrupt Enable overflow interrupt
NOTE: When you write a "1" T3CON.2, the timer 3 counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write operation, the T3CON.2 value is automatically cleared to "0".
4-44
S3C825A/P825A
CONTROL REGISTER
UARTCON -- UART Control Register
Bit Identifier
RESET Value
FAH
.4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W .2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank0
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
.7 0 R/W
.6 0 R/W
.5 0 R/W
Read/Write Addressing Mode .7 - .6
Register addressing mode only 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Mode 0: shift register (fOSC/(16 x (BRDATA + 1)) Mode 1: 8-Bit UART (fOSC/(16 x (BRDATA + 1)) Mode 2: 9-Bit UART fOSC/16 Mode 3: 9-Bit UART (fOSC/(16 x (BRDATA + 1))
.5
Multiprocessor Communication Enable Bit (for modes 2 and 3 only) 0 1 Disable Enable
.4
Serial Data Receive Enable Bit 0 1 Disable Enable
.3
TB8 Location of the 9th data bit to be transmitted in UART mode 2 or 3 ("0" or "1")
.2
RB8 Location of the 9th data bit to be received in UART mode 2 or 3 ("0" or "1")
.1
Receive Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable Rx interrupt Enable Rx interrupt
.0
Transmit Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable Tx interrupt Enable Tx interrupt
NOTES: 1. In mode 2 or 3, if the MCE bit is set to "1" then the receive interrupt will not be activated if the received 9th data bit "0". In mode 1, if MCE = "1" the receive interrupt will not be activated if a valid stop bit was not received. In mode 0, the MCE bit should be "0". 2. The descriptions for 8-bit and 9-bit UART mode do not include start and stop bits for serial data receive and transmit. 3. Rx / Tx interrupt pending bits are in INTPND register.
4-45
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C825A/P825A
WTCON -- Watch Timer Control Register
Bit Identifier RESET Value Read/Write .7 .7 0 R/W .6 0 R/W .5 0 R/W .4 0 R/W .3 0 R/W
EFH
.2 0 R/W
Set 1, Bank1
.1 0 R/W .0 0 R/W
Watch Timer Clock Selection Bit 0 1 Select main clock divided by 27 (fx/128) Select sub clock(fxt)
.6
Watch Timer Interrupt Enable Bit 0 1 Disable watch timer interrupt Enable watch timer interrupt
.5-.4
Buzzer Signal Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.5 kHz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz
.3-.2
Watch Timer Speed Selection Bits 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Set watch timer interrupt to 1s Set watch timer interrupt to 0.5s Set watch timer interrupt to 0.25s Set watch timer interrupt to 3.91ms
.1
Watch Timer Enable Bit 0 1 Disable watch timer; Clear frequency dividing circuits Enable watch timer
.0
Watch Timer Interrupt Pending Bit 0 0 1 No interrupt pending (when read) Clear pending bit (when write) Interrupt is pending (when read)
4-46
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
5
OVERVIEW
Levels
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
The S3C8-series interrupt structure has three basic components: levels, vectors, and sources. The SAM88RC CPU recognizes up to eight interrupt levels and supports up to 128 interrupt vectors. When a specific interrupt level has more than one vector address, the vector priorities are established in hardware. A vector address can be assigned to one or more sources.
Interrupt levels are the main unit for interrupt priority assignment and recognition. All peripherals and I/O blocks can issue interrupt requests. In other words, peripheral and I/O operations are interrupt-driven. There are eight possible interrupt levels: IRQ0-IRQ7, also called level 0-level 7. Each interrupt level directly corresponds to an interrupt request number (IRQn). The total number of interrupt levels used in the interrupt structure varies from device to device. The S3C825A interrupt structure recognizes eight interrupt levels. The interrupt level numbers 0 through 7 do not necessarily indicate the relative priority of the levels. They are just identifiers for the interrupt levels that are recognized by the CPU. The relative priority of different interrupt levels is determined by settings in the interrupt priority register, IPR. Interrupt group and subgroup logic controlled by IPR settings lets you define more complex priority relationships between different levels. Vectors Each interrupt level can have one or more interrupt vectors, or it may have no vector address assigned at all. The maximum number of vectors that can be supported for a given level is 128 (The actual number of vectors used for S3C8-series devices is always much smaller). If an interrupt level has more than one vector address, the vector priorities are set in hardware. S3C825A uses twenty three vectors. Sources A source is any peripheral that generates an interrupt. A source can be an external pin or a counter overflow. Each vector can have several interrupt sources. In the S3C825A interrupt structure, there are twenty three possible interrupt sources. When a service routine starts, the respective pending bit should be either cleared automatically by hardware or cleared "manually" by program software. The characteristics of the source's pending mechanism determine which method would be used to clear its respective pending bit.
5-1
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT TYPES The three components of the S3C8 interrupt structure described before -- levels, vectors, and sources -- are combined to determine the interrupt structure of an individual device and to make full use of its available interrupt logic. There are three possible combinations of interrupt structure components, called interrupt types 1, 2, and 3. The types differ in the number of vectors and interrupt sources assigned to each level (see Figure 5-1): Type 1: Type 2: Type 3: One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + one source (S1) One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + multiple sources (S1 - Sn) One level (IRQn) + multiple vectors (V1 - Vn) + multiple sources (S1 - Sn , Sn+1 - Sn+m)
In the S3C825A microcontroller, two interrupt types are implemented.
Levels Type 1: IRQn
Vectors V1
Sources S1 S1
Type 2:
IRQn
V1
S2 S3 Sn
V1 Type 3: IRQn V2 V3 Vn
S1 S2 S3 Sn Sn + 1
NOTES: 1. The number of Sn and Vn value is expandable. 2. In the S3C825A implementation, interrupt types 1 and 3 are used.
Sn + 2 Sn + m
Figure 5-1. S3C8-Series Interrupt Types
5-2
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C825A INTERRUPT STRUCTURE The S3C825A microcontroller supports twenty three interrupt sources. All twenty three of the interrupt sources have a corresponding interrupt vector address. Eight interrupt levels are recognized by the CPU in this devicespecific interrupt structure, as shown in Figure 5-2. When multiple interrupt levels are active, the interrupt priority register (IPR) determines the order in which contending interrupts are to be serviced. If multiple interrupts occur within the same interrupt level, the interrupt with the lowest vector address is usually processed first (The relative priorities of multiple interrupts within a single level are fixed in hardware). When the CPU grants an interrupt request, interrupt processing starts. All other interrupts are disabled and the program counter value and status flags are pushed to stack. The starting address of the service routine is fetched from the appropriate vector address (plus the next 8-bit value to concatenate the full 16-bit address) and the service routine is executed.
5-3
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C825A/P825A
Levels RESET IRQ0
Vectors 100H E0H E2H E4H
Sources Basic timer overflow Timer 0 match/capture Timer 0 overflow Timer B match Timer 1/A match Timer 2 match Timer 3 match/capture Timer 3 overflow SIO interrrupt UART data transmit UART data receive Watch timer P1.0 external interrupt P1.1 external interrupt P1.2 external interrupt P1.3 external interrupt P1.4 external interrupt P1.5 external interrupt P1.6 external interrupt P1.7 external interrupt P4.0 external interrupt P4.1 external interrupt P4.2 external interrupt P4.3 external interrupt
Reset/Clear H/W S/W H/W,S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W H/W, S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W S/W
IRQ1
E6H E8H
IRQ2
EAH ECH D0H
IRQ3
D2H D4H
IRQ4
D6H D8H DAH
IRQ5 DBH DCH C0H C2H IRQ6 C4H C6H C8H CAH IRQ7 CCH CEH
NOTES: 1. Within a given interrupt level, the low vector address has high priority. For example, E0H has higher priority than E2H within the level IRQ0 the priorities within each level are set at the factory. 2. External interrupts are triggered by a rising or falling edge, depending on the corresponding control register setting.
Figure 5-2. S3C825A Interrupt Structure
5-4
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESSES All interrupt vector addresses for the S3C825A interrupt structure are stored in the vector address area of the first 256 bytes of the program memory (ROM). You can allocate unused locations in the vector address area as normal program memory. If you do so, please be careful not to overwrite any of the stored vector addresses (Table 5-1 lists all vector addresses). The program reset address in the ROM is 0100H.
(Decimal) 49,151
(HEX) BFFFH
48K-byte Program Memory Area
255 Interrupt Vector Address Area 0
100H FFH
RESET Address
00H
Figure 5-3. ROM Vector Address Area
5-5
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C825A/P825A
Table 5-1. Interrupt Vectors Vector Address Decimal Value 256 226 224 230 228 236 234 232 212 210 208 214 222 220 218 216 198 196 194 192 206 204 202 200 Hex Value 100H E2H E0H E6H E4H ECH EAH E8H D4H D2H D0H D6H DEH DCH DAH D8H C6H C4H C2H C0H CEH CCH CAH C8H Basic timer overflow Timer 0 overflow Timer 0 match/capture Timer 1/A match Timer B match Timer 3 overflow Timer 3 match/capture Timer 2 match UART data receive UART data transmit SIO interrupt Watch timer P2.7 external interrupt P2.6 external interrupt P2.5 external interrupt P2.4 external interrupt P4.7 external interrupt P4.6 external interrupt P4.5 external interrupt P4.4 external interrupt P4.3 external interrupt P4.2 external interrupt P4.1 external interrupt P4.0 external interrupt IRQ7 IRQ6 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ3 IRQ2 IRQ1 Interrupt Source Request Interrupt Level RESET IRQ0 Priority in Level - 1 0 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0 - 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 Reset/Clear H/W S/W
NOTES: 1. Interrupt priorities are identified in inverse order: "0" is the highest priority, "1" is the next highest, and so on. 2. If two or more interrupts within the same level contend, the interrupt with the lowest vector address usually has priority over one with a higher vector address. The priorities within a given level are fixed in hardware.
5-6
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
ENABLE/DISABLE INTERRUPT INSTRUCTIONS (EI, DI) Executing the Enable Interrupts (EI) instruction globally enables the interrupt structure. All interrupts are then serviced as they occur according to the established priorities. NOTE The system initialization routine executed after a reset must always contain an EI instruction to globally enable the interrupt structure. During the normal operation, you can execute the DI (Disable Interrupt) instruction at any time to globally disable interrupt processing. The EI and DI instructions change the value of bit 0 in the SYM register. SYSTEM-LEVEL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS In addition to the control registers for specific interrupt sources, four system-level registers control interrupt processing: -- The interrupt mask register, IMR, enables (un-masks) or disables (masks) interrupt levels. -- The interrupt priority register, IPR, controls the relative priorities of interrupt levels. -- The interrupt request register, IRQ, contains interrupt pending flags for each interrupt level (as opposed to each interrupt source). -- The system mode register, SYM, enables or disables global interrupt processing (SYM settings also enable fast interrupts and control the activity of external interface, if implemented).
Table 5-2. Interrupt Control Register Overview Control Register Interrupt mask register Interrupt priority register ID IMR IPR R/W R/W R/W Function Description Bit settings in the IMR register enable or disable interrupt processing for each of the eight interrupt levels: IRQ0-IRQ7. Controls the relative processing priorities of the interrupt levels. The eight levels of S3C825A are organized into three groups: A, B, and C. Group A is IRQ0 and IRQ1, group B is IRQ2, IRQ3 and IRQ4, and group C is IRQ5, IRQ6, and IRQ7. This register contains a request pending bit for each interrupt level. This register enables/disables fast interrupt processing, and dynamic global interrupt processing.
Interrupt request register System mode register
IRQ SYM
R R/W
NOTE: Before IMR register is changed to any value, all interrupts must be disable. Using DI instruction is recommended.
5-7
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT PROCESSING CONTROL POINTS Interrupt processing can therefore be controlled in two ways: globally or by specific interrupt level and source. The system-level control points in the interrupt structure are: -- Global interrupt enable and disable (by EI and DI instructions or by direct manipulation of SYM.0 ) -- Interrupt level enable/disable settings (IMR register) -- Interrupt level priority settings (IPR register) -- Interrupt source enable/disable settings in the corresponding peripheral control registers NOTE When writing an application program that handles interrupt processing, be sure to include the necessary register file address (register pointer) information.
EI RESET IRQ0-IRQ7, Interrupts
S R
Q
Interrupt Request Register (Read-only)
Polling Cycle
Interrupt Priority Register
Vector Interrupt Cycle
Interrupt Mask Register
Global Interrupt Control (EI, DI or SYM.0 manipulation)
Figure 5-4. Interrupt Function Diagram
5-8
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS For each interrupt source there is one or more corresponding peripheral control registers that let you control the interrupt generated by the related peripheral (see Table 5-3). Table 5-3. Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers Interrupt Source Timer 0 overflow Timer 0 match/capture Interrupt Level IRQ0 Register(s) T0CON T0CNT T0DATA INTPND TACON TACNT TADATA TBCON TBCNT TBDATA IRQ2 T3CON T3CNTH, T3CNTL T3DATAH, T3DATAL T2CON T2CNT T2DATA IRQ3 UARTCON UDATA BRDATA SIOCON SIODATA SIOPS IRQ4 IRQ5 WTCON P2CONH P2INT Location(s) in Set 1 E5H, bank 0 E3H, bank 0 E4H, bank 0 D0H, bank 0 EBH, bank 0 E7H, bank 0 E9H, bank0 EAH, bank 0 E6H, bank 0 E8H, bank 0 F8H, bank 0 F4H, F5H, bank 0 F6H, F7H, bank 0 EEH, bank 0 ECH, bank 0 EDH, bank 0 FAH, bank 0 F9H, bank 0 FBH, bank 0 E0H, bank 0 E1H, bank 0 E2H, bank 0 EFH, bank 1 E0H, bank 1 E3H, bank 1
Timer 1/A match
IRQ1
Timer B match
Timer 3 overflow Timer 3 match/capture Timer 2 match
UART data receive UART data transmit SIO interrupt
Watch timer P2.7 external interrupt P2.6 external interrupt P2.5 external interrupt P2.4 external interrupt P4.7 external interrupt P4.6 external interrupt P4.5 external interrupt P4.4 external interrupt P4.3 external interrupt P4.2 external interrupt P4.1 external interrupt P4.0 external interrupt
IRQ6
P4CONH P4INT P4PND P4EDGE P4CONL P4INT 4PND P4EDGE
E8H, bank 1 EAH, bank 1 EBH, bank 1 E7H, bank 1 E9H, bank 1 EAH, bank 1 EBH, bank 1 E7H, bank 1
IRQ7
5-9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C825A/P825A
SYSTEM MODE REGISTER (SYM) The system mode register, SYM (set 1, DEH), is used to globally enable and disable interrupt processing and to control fast interrupt processing (see Figure 5-5). A reset clears SYM.1, and SYM.0 to "0". The 3-bit value for fast interrupt level selection, SYM.4-SYM.2, is undetermined. The instructions EI and DI enable and disable global interrupt processing, respectively, by modifying the bit 0 value of the SYM register. In order to enable interrupt processing an Enable Interrupt (EI) instruction must be included in the initialization routine, which follows a reset operation. Although you can manipulate SYM.0 directly to enable and disable interrupts during the normal operation, it is recommended to use the EI and DI instructions for this purpose.
System Mode Register (SYM) DEH, Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Always logic "0"
Global interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable all interrupts processing 1 = Enable all interrupts processing Fast interrupt level selection bits: 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 Fast interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable fast interrupts processing 1 = Enable fast interrupts processing
Not used for the S3C825A
Figure 5-5. System Mode Register (SYM)
5-10
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER (IMR) The interrupt mask register, IMR (set 1, DDH) is used to enable or disable interrupt processing for individual interrupt levels. After a reset, all IMR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be written to their required settings by the initialization routine. Each IMR bit corresponds to a specific interrupt level: bit 1 to IRQ1, bit 2 to IRQ2, and so on. When the IMR bit of an interrupt level is cleared to "0", interrupt processing for that level is disabled (masked). When you set a level's IMR bit to "1", interrupt processing for the level is enabled (not masked). The IMR register is mapped to register location DDH in set 1. Bit values can be read and written by instructions using the Register addressing mode.
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR) DDH, Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
IRQ2 IRQ6 IRQ5 IRQ4 IRQ3
IRQ1
IRQ0
IRQ7
Interrupt level enable bits 0 = Disable (mask) interrupt level 1 = Enable (un-mask) interrupt level
NOTE:
Before IMR register is changed to any value, all interrupts must be disable. Using DI instruction is recommended.
Figure 5-6. Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
5-11
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER (IPR) The interrupt priority register, IPR (set 1, bank 0, FFH), is used to set the relative priorities of the interrupt levels in the microcontroller's interrupt structure. After a reset, all IPR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be written to their required settings by the initialization routine. When more than one interrupt sources are active, the source with the highest priority level is serviced first. If two sources belong to the same interrupt level, the source with the lower vector address usually has the priority (This priority is fixed in hardware). To support programming of the relative interrupt level priorities, they are organized into groups and subgroups by the interrupt logic. Please note that these groups (and subgroups) are used only by IPR logic for the IPR register priority definitions (see Figure 5-7): Group A Group B Group C IRQ0, IRQ1 IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ3 IRQ5, IRQ6, IRQ7
IPR Group A
IPR Group B
IPR Group C
A1
A2
B1 B21
B2 B22 IRQ4
C1 C21 IRQ5 IRQ6
C2 C22 IRQ7
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2 IRQ3
Figure 5-7. Interrupt Request Priority Groups As you can see in Figure 5-8, IPR.7, IPR.4, and IPR.1 control the relative priority of interrupt groups A, B, and C. For example, the setting "001B" for these bits would select the group relationship B > C > A. The setting "101B" would select the relationship C > B > A. The functions of the other IPR bit settings are as follows: -- IPR.5 controls the relative priorities of group C interrupts. -- Interrupt group C includes a subgroup that has an additional priority relationship among the interrupt levels 5, 6, and 7. IPR.6 defines the subgroup C relationship. IPR.5 controls the interrupt group C. -- IPR.0 controls the relative priority setting of IRQ0 and IRQ1 interrupts.
5-12
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR) FFH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB Group priority: D7 D4 D1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 = Undefined =B>C>A =A>B>C =B>A>C =C>A>B =C>B>A =A>C>B = Undefined .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Group A 0 = IRQ0 > IRQ1 1 = IRQ1 > IRQ0 Group B 0 = IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4) 1 = (IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2 Subgroup B 0 = IRQ3 > IRQ4 1 = IRQ4 > IRQ3 Group C 0 = IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7) 1 = (IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5 Subgroup C 0 = IRQ6 > IRQ7 1 = IRQ7 > IRQ6
Figure 5-8. Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)
5-13
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER (IRQ) You can poll bit values in the interrupt request register, IRQ (set 1, DCH), to monitor interrupt request status for all levels in the microcontroller's interrupt structure. Each bit corresponds to the interrupt level of the same number: bit 0 to IRQ0, bit 1 to IRQ1, and so on. A "0" indicates that no interrupt request is currently being issued for that level. A "1" indicates that an interrupt request has been generated for that level. IRQ bit values are read-only addressable using Register addressing mode. You can read (test) the contents of the IRQ register at any time using bit or byte addressing to determine the current interrupt request status of specific interrupt levels. After a reset, all IRQ status bits are cleared to "0". You can poll IRQ register values even if a DI instruction has been executed (that is, if global interrupt processing is disabled). If an interrupt occurs while the interrupt structure is disabled, the CPU will not service it. You can, however, still detect the interrupt request by polling the IRQ register. In this way, you can determine which events occurred while the interrupt structure was globally disabled.
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) DCH, Set 1, Read-only MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
IRQ7
IRQ6
IRQ5
IRQ4
IRQ3
IRQ2
IRQ1
IRQ0
Interrupt level request pending bits: 0 = Interrupt level is not pending 1 = Interrupt level is pending
Figure 5-9. Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)
5-14
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT PENDING FUNCTION TYPES Overview There are two types of interrupt pending bits: one type that is automatically cleared by hardware after the interrupt service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared in the interrupt service routine. Pending Bits Cleared Automatically by Hardware For interrupt pending bits that are cleared automatically by hardware, interrupt logic sets the corresponding pending bit to "1" when a request occurs. It then issues an IRQ pulse to inform the CPU that an interrupt is waiting to be serviced. The CPU acknowledges the interrupt source by sending an IACK, executes the service routine, and clears the pending bit to "0". This type of pending bit is not mapped and cannot, therefore, be read or written by application software. In the S3C825A interrupt structure, the timer 0 overflow interrupt (IRQ0) and Timer 3 overflow interrupt (IRQ2) belongs to this category of interrupts in which pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware. Pending Bits Cleared by the Service Routine The second type of pending bit is the one that should be cleared by program software. The service routine must clear the appropriate pending bit before a return-from-interrupt subroutine (IRET) occurs. To do this, a "0" must be written to the corresponding pending bit location in the source's mode or control register.
5-15
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT SOURCE POLLING SEQUENCE The interrupt request polling and servicing sequence is as follows: 1. A source generates an interrupt request by setting the interrupt request bit to "1". 2. The CPU polling procedure identifies a pending condition for that source. 3. The CPU checks the source's interrupt level. 4. The CPU generates an interrupt acknowledge signal. 5. Interrupt logic determines the interrupt's vector address. 6. The service routine starts and the source's pending bit is cleared to "0" (by hardware or by software). 7. The CPU continues polling for interrupt requests.
INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES Before an interrupt request is serviced, the following conditions must be met: -- Interrupt processing must be globally enabled (EI, SYM.0 = "1") -- The interrupt level must be enabled (IMR register) -- The interrupt level must have the highest priority if more than one levels are currently requesting service -- The interrupt must be enabled at the interrupt's source (peripheral control register) When all the above conditions are met, the interrupt request is acknowledged at the end of the instruction cycle. The CPU then initiates an interrupt machine cycle that completes the following processing sequence: 1. Reset (clear to "0") the interrupt enable bit in the SYM register (SYM.0) to disable all subsequent interrupts. 2. Save the program counter (PC) and status flags to the system stack. 3. Branch to the interrupt vector to fetch the address of the service routine. 4. Pass control to the interrupt service routine. When the interrupt service routine is completed, the CPU issues an Interrupt Return (IRET). The IRET restores the PC and status flags, setting SYM.0 to "1". It allows the CPU to process the next interrupt request.
5-16
S3C825A/P825A
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
GENERATING INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESSES The interrupt vector area in the ROM (00H-FFH) contains the addresses of interrupt service routines that correspond to each level in the interrupt structure. Vectored interrupt processing follows this sequence: 1. Push the program counter's low-byte value to the stack. 2. Push the program counter's high-byte value to the stack. 3. Push the FLAG register values to the stack. 4. Fetch the service routine's high-byte address from the vector location. 5. Fetch the service routine's low-byte address from the vector location. 6. Branch to the service routine specified by the concatenated 16-bit vector address. NOTE A 16-bit vector address always begins at an even-numbered ROM address within the range of 00H-FFH.
NESTING OF VECTORED INTERRUPTS It is possible to nest a higher-priority interrupt request while a lower-priority request is being serviced. To do this, you must follow these steps: 1. Push the current 8-bit interrupt mask register (IMR) value to the stack (PUSH IMR). 2. Load the IMR register with a new mask value that enables only the higher priority interrupt. 3. Execute an EI instruction to enable interrupt processing (a higher priority interrupt will be processed if it occurs). 4. When the lower-priority interrupt service routine ends, restore the IMR to its original value by returning the previous mask value from the stack (POP IMR). 5. Execute an IRET. Depending on the application, you may be able to simplify the procedure above to some extent. INSTRUCTION POINTER (IP) The instruction pointer (IP) is adopted by all the S3C8-series microcontrollers to control the optional high-speed interrupt processing feature called fast interrupts. The IP consists of register pair DAH and DBH. The names of IP registers are IPH (high byte, IP15-IP8) and IPL (low byte, IP7-IP0). FAST INTERRUPT PROCESSING The feature called fast interrupt processing allows an interrupt within a given level to be completed in approximately 6 clock cycles rather than the usual 16 clock cycles. To select a specific interrupt level for fast interrupt processing, you write the appropriate 3-bit value to SYM.4-SYM.2. Then, to enable fast interrupt processing for the selected level, you set SYM.1 to "1".
5-17
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C825A/P825A
FAST INTERRUPT PROCESSING (Continued) Two other system registers support fast interrupt processing: -- The instruction pointer (IP) contains the starting address of the service routine (and is later used to swap the program counter values), and -- When a fast interrupt occurs, the contents of the FLAGS register is stored in an unmapped, dedicated register called FLAGS' ("FLAGS prime"). NOTE For the S3C825A microcontroller, the service routine for any one of the eight interrupt levels: IRQ0- IRQ7, can be selected for fast interrupt processing. Procedure for Initiating Fast Interrupts To initiate fast interrupt processing, follow these steps: 1. Load the start address of the service routine into the instruction pointer (IP). 2. Load the interrupt level number (IRQn) into the fast interrupt selection field (SYM.4-SYM.2) 3. Write a "1" to the fast interrupt enable bit in the SYM register. Fast Interrupt Service Routine When an interrupt occurs in the level selected for fast interrupt processing, the following events occur: 1. The contents of the instruction pointer and the PC are swapped. 2. The FLAG register values are written to the FLAGS' ("FLAGS prime") register. 3. The fast interrupt status bit in the FLAGS register is set. 4. The interrupt is serviced. 5. Assuming that the fast interrupt status bit is set, when the fast interrupt service routine ends, the instruction pointer and PC values are swapped back. 6. The content of FLAGS' ("FLAGS prime") is copied automatically back to the FLAGS register. 7. The fast interrupt status bit in FLAGS is cleared automatically. Relationship to Interrupt Pending Bit Types As described previously, there are two types of interrupt pending bits: One type that is automatically cleared by hardware after the interrupt service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared by the application program's interrupt service routine. You can select fast interrupt processing for interrupts with either type of pending condition clear function -- by hardware or by software. Programming Guidelines Remember that the only way to enable/disable a fast interrupt is to set/clear the fast interrupt enable bit in the SYM register, SYM.1. Executing an EI or DI instruction globally enables or disables all interrupt processing, including fast interrupts. If you use fast interrupts, remember to load the IP with a new start address when the fast interrupt service routine ends.
5-18
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
6
OVERVIEW
INSTRUCTION SET
The SAM88RC instruction set is specifically designed to support the large register files that are typical of most SAM8 microcontrollers. There are 78 instructions. The powerful data manipulation capabilities and features of the instruction set include: -- A full complement of 8-bit arithmetic and logic operations, including multiply and divide -- No special I/O instructions (I/O control/data registers are mapped directly into the register file) -- Decimal adjustment included in binary-coded decimal (BCD) operations -- 16-bit (word) data can be incremented and decremented -- Flexible instructions for bit addressing, rotate, and shift operations
DATA TYPES The SAM8 CPU performs operations on bits, bytes, BCD digits, and two-byte words. Bits in the register file can be set, cleared, complemented, and tested. Bits within a byte are numbered from 7 to 0, where bit 0 is the least significant (right-most) bit. REGISTER ADDRESSING To access an individual register, an 8-bit address in the range 0-255 or the 4-bit address of a working register is specified. Paired registers can be used to construct 16-bit data or 16-bit program memory or data memory addresses. For detailed information about register addressing, please refer to Section 2, "Address Spaces." ADDRESSING MODES There are seven explicit addressing modes: Register (R), Indirect Register (IR), Indexed (X), Direct (DA), Relative (RA), Immediate (IM), and Indirect (IA). For detailed descriptions of these addressing modes, please refer to Section 3, "Addressing Modes."
6-1
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary Mnemonic Operands Instruction
Load Instructions CLR LD LDB LDE LDC LDED LDCD LDEI LDCI LDEPD LDCPD LDEPI LDCPI LDW POP POPUD POPUI PUSH PUSHUD PUSHUI dst dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src dst dst,src dst,src src dst,src dst,src Clear Load Load bit Load external data memory Load program memory Load external data memory and decrement Load program memory and decrement Load external data memory and increment Load program memory and increment Load external data memory with pre-decrement Load program memory with pre-decrement Load external data memory with pre-increment Load program memory with pre-increment Load word Pop from stack Pop user stack (decrementing) Pop user stack (incrementing) Push to stack Push user stack (decrementing) Push user stack (incrementing)
6-2
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Continued) Mnemonic Operands Instruction
Arithmetic Instructions ADC ADD CP DA DEC DECW DIV INC INCW MULT SBC SUB dst,src dst,src dst,src dst dst dst dst,src dst dst dst,src dst,src dst,src Add with carry Add Compare Decimal adjust Decrement Decrement word Divide Increment Increment word Multiply Subtract with carry Subtract
Logic Instructions AND COM OR XOR dst,src dst dst,src dst,src Logical AND Complement Logical OR Logical exclusive OR
6-3
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Continued) Mnemonic Operands Instruction
Program Control Instructions BTJRF BTJRT CALL CPIJE CPIJNE DJNZ ENTER EXIT IRET JP JP JR NEXT RET WFI Bit Manipulation Instructions BAND BCP BITC BITR BITS BOR BXOR TCM TM dst,src dst,src dst dst dst dst,src dst,src dst,src dst,src Bit AND Bit compare Bit complement Bit reset Bit set Bit OR Bit XOR Test complement under mask Test under mask cc,dst dst cc,dst dst,src dst,src dst dst,src dst,src r,dst Bit test and jump relative on false Bit test and jump relative on true Call procedure Compare, increment and jump on equal Compare, increment and jump on non-equal Decrement register and jump on non-zero Enter Exit Interrupt return Jump on condition code Jump unconditional Jump relative on condition code Next Return Wait for interrupt
6-4
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Concluded) Mnemonic Operands Instruction
Rotate and Shift Instructions RL RLC RR RRC SRA SWAP dst dst dst dst dst dst Rotate left Rotate left through carry Rotate right Rotate right through carry Shift right arithmetic Swap nibbles
CPU Control Instructions CCF DI EI IDLE NOP RCF SB0 SB1 SCF SRP SRP0 SRP1 STOP src src src Complement carry flag Disable interrupts Enable interrupts Enter Idle mode No operation Reset carry flag Set bank 0 Set bank 1 Set carry flag Set register pointers Set register pointer 0 Set register pointer 1 Enter Stop mode
6-5
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
FLAGS REGISTER (FLAGS) The flags register FLAGS contains eight bits that describe the current status of CPU operations. Four of these bits, FLAGS.7-FLAGS.4, can be tested and used with conditional jump instructions; two others FLAGS.3 and FLAGS.2 are used for BCD arithmetic. The FLAGS register also contains a bit to indicate the status of fast interrupt processing (FLAGS.1) and a bank address status bit (FLAGS.0) to indicate whether bank 0 or bank 1 is currently being addressed. FLAGS register can be set or reset by instructions as long as its outcome does not affect the flags, such as, Load instruction. Logical and Arithmetic instructions such as, AND, OR, XOR, ADD, and SUB can affect the Flags register. For example, the AND instruction updates the Zero, Sign and Overflow flags based on the outcome of the AND instruction. If the AND instruction uses the Flags register as the destination, then simultaneously, two write will occur to the Flags register producing an unpredictable result.
System Flags Register (FLAGS) D5H, Set 1, R/W MSB Carry flag (C) .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB Bank address status flag (BA) Fast interrupt status flag (FIS) Half-carry flag (H)
Zero flag (Z)
Sign flag (S)
Overflow flag (V)
Decimal adjust flag (D)
Figure 6-1. System Flags Register (FLAGS)
6-6
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
FLAG DESCRIPTIONS
C
Carry Flag (FLAGS.7) The C flag is set to "1" if the result from an arithmetic operation generates a carry-out from or a borrow to the bit 7 position (MSB). After rotate and shift operations, it contains the last value shifted out of the specified register. Program instructions can set, clear, or complement the carry flag.
Z
Zero Flag (FLAGS.6) For arithmetic and logic operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result of the operation is zero. For operations that test register bits, and for shift and rotate operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result is logic zero.
S V D
Sign Flag (FLAGS.5) Following arithmetic, logic, rotate, or shift operations, the sign bit identifies the state of the MSB of the result. A logic zero indicates a positive number and a logic one indicates a negative number. Overflow Flag (FLAGS.4) The V flag is set to "1" when the result of a two's-complement operation is greater than + 127 or less than - 128. It is also cleared to "0" following logic operations. Decimal Adjust Flag (FLAGS.3) The DA bit is used to specify what type of instruction was executed last during BCD operations, so that a subsequent decimal adjust operation can execute correctly. The DA bit is not usually accessed by programmers, and cannot be used as a test condition.
H
Half-Carry Flag (FLAGS.2) The H bit is set to "1" whenever an addition generates a carry-out of bit 3, or when a subtraction borrows out of bit 4. It is used by the Decimal Adjust (DA) instruction to convert the binary result of a previous addition or subtraction into the correct decimal (BCD) result. The H flag is seldom accessed directly by a program.
FIS
Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FLAGS.1) The FIS bit is set during a fast interrupt cycle and reset during the IRET following interrupt servicing. When set, it inhibits all interrupts and causes the fast interrupt return to be executed when the IRET instruction is executed.
BA
Bank Address Flag (FLAGS.0) The BA flag indicates which register bank in the set 1 area of the internal register file is currently selected, bank 0 or bank 1. The BA flag is cleared to "0" (select bank 0) when you execute the SB0 instruction and is set to "1" (select bank 1) when you execute the SB1 instruction.
6-7
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET NOTATION Table 6-2. Flag Notation Conventions Flag C Z S V D H 0 1 * - x Carry flag Zero flag Sign flag Overflow flag Decimal-adjust flag Half-carry flag Cleared to logic zero Set to logic one Set or cleared according to operation Value is unaffected Value is undefined Description
Table 6-3. Instruction Set Symbols Symbol dst src @ PC IP FLAGS RP # H D B opc Source operand Indirect register address prefix Program counter Instruction pointer Flags register (D5H) Register pointer Immediate operand or register address prefix Hexadecimal number suffix Decimal number suffix Binary number suffix Opcode Description Destination operand
6-8
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-4. Instruction Notation Conventions Notation cc r rb r0 rr R Rb RR IA Ir IR Irr IRR X XS xl da ra im iml Condition code Working register only Bit (b) of working register Bit 0 (LSB) of working register Working register pair Register or working register Bit 'b' of register or working register Register pair or working register pair Indirect addressing mode Indirect working register only Indirect working register pair only Indirect register pair or indirect working register pair Indexed addressing mode Indexed (short offset) addressing mode Indexed (long offset) addressing mode Direct addressing mode Relative addressing mode Immediate addressing mode Immediate (long) addressing mode Description Rn (n = 0-15) Rn.b (n = 0-15, b = 0-7) Rn (n = 0-15) RRp (p = 0, 2, 4, ..., 14) reg or Rn (reg = 0-255, n = 0-15) reg.b (reg = 0-255, b = 0-7) reg or RRp (reg = 0-254, even number only, where p = 0, 2, ..., 14) addr (addr = 0-254, even number only) @Rn (n = 0-15) @RRp (p = 0, 2, ..., 14) @RRp or @reg (reg = 0-254, even only, where p = 0, 2, ..., 14) #reg [Rn] (reg = 0-255, n = 0-15) #addr [RRp] (addr = range -128 to +127, where p = 0, 2, ..., 14) #addr [RRp] (addr = range 0-65535, where p = 0, 2, ..., 14) addr (addr = range 0-65535) addr (addr = number in the range +127 to -128 that is an offset relative to the address of the next instruction) #data (data = 0-255) #data (data = range 0-65535) Actual Operand Range See list of condition codes in Table 6-6.
Indirect register or indirect working register @Rn or @reg (reg = 0-255, n = 0-15)
6-9
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
Table 6-5. Opcode Quick Reference OPCODE MAP LOWER NIBBLE (HEX) - U P P E R 0 1 2 3 4 5 N I B B L E 6 7 8 9 A B C H E X D E F 0 DEC R1 RLC R1 INC R1 JP IRR1 DA R1 POP R1 COM R1 PUSH R2 DECW RR1 RL R1 INCW RR1 CLR R1 RRC R1 SRA R1 RR R1 SWAP R1 1 DEC IR1 RLC IR1 INC IR1 SRP/0/1 IM DA IR1 POP IR1 COM IR1 PUSH IR2 DECW IR1 RL IR1 INCW IR1 CLR IR1 RRC IR1 SRA IR1 RR IR1 SWAP IR1 2 ADD r1,r2 ADC r1,r2 SUB r1,r2 SBC r1,r2 OR r1,r2 AND r1,r2 TCM r1,r2 TM r1,r2 PUSHUD IR1,R2 POPUD IR2,R1 CP r1,r2 XOR r1,r2 CPIJE Ir,r2,RA CPIJNE Irr,r2,RA LDCD r1,Irr2 LDCPD r2,Irr1 3 ADD r1,Ir2 ADC r1,Ir2 SUB r1,Ir2 SBC r1,Ir2 OR r1,Ir2 AND r1,Ir2 TCM r1,Ir2 TM r1,Ir2 PUSHUI IR1,R2 POPUI IR2,R1 CP r1,Ir2 XOR r1,Ir2 LDC r1,Irr2 LDC r2,Irr1 LDCI r1,Irr2 LDCPI r2,Irr1 4 ADD R2,R1 ADC R2,R1 SUB R2,R1 SBC R2,R1 OR R2,R1 AND R2,R1 TCM R2,R1 TM R2,R1 MULT R2,RR1 DIV R2,RR1 CP R2,R1 XOR R2,R1 LDW RR2,RR1 CALL IA1 LD R2,R1 CALL IRR1 LD R2,IR1 LD IR2,R1 5 ADD IR2,R1 ADC IR2,R1 SUB IR2,R1 SBC IR2,R1 OR IR2,R1 AND IR2,R1 TCM IR2,R1 TM IR2,R1 MULT IR2,RR1 DIV IR2,RR1 CP IR2,R1 XOR IR2,R1 LDW IR2,RR1 6 ADD R1,IM ADC R1,IM SUB R1,IM SBC R1,IM OR R1,IM AND R1,IM TCM R1,IM TM R1,IM MULT IM,RR1 DIV IM,RR1 CP R1,IM XOR R1,IM LDW RR1,IML LD IR1,IM LD R1,IM CALL DA1 7 BOR r0-Rb BCP r1.b, R2 BXOR r0-Rb BTJR r2.b, RA LDB r0-Rb BITC r1.b BAND r0-Rb BIT r1.b LD r1, x, r2 LD r2, x, r1 LDC r1, Irr2, xL LDC r2, Irr2, xL LD r1, Ir2 LD Ir1, r2 LDC r1, Irr2, xs LDC r2, Irr1, xs
6-10
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-5. Opcode Quick Reference (Continued) OPCODE MAP LOWER NIBBLE (HEX) - U P P E R 0 1 2 3 4 5 N I B B L E 6 7 8 9 A B C H E X D E F LD r1,R2 LD r2,R1 DJNZ r1,RA JR cc,RA LD r1,IM JP cc,DA INC r1 8 LD r1,R2 9 LD r2,R1 A DJNZ r1,RA B JR cc,RA C LD r1,IM D JP cc,DA E INC r1 F NEXT ENTER EXIT WFI SB0 SB1 IDLE



STOP DI EI RET IRET RCF

SCF CCF NOP
6-11
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
CONDITION CODES The opcode of a conditional jump always contains a 4-bit field called the condition code (cc). This specifies under which conditions it is to execute the jump. For example, a conditional jump with the condition code for "equal" after a compare operation only jumps if the two operands are equal. Condition codes are listed in Table 6-6. The carry (C), zero (Z), sign (S), and overflow (V) flags are used to control the operation of conditional jump instructions. Table 6-6. Condition Codes Binary 0000 1000 0111
(note)
Mnemonic F T C NC Z NZ PL MI OV NOV
Description Always false Always true Carry No carry Zero Not zero Plus Minus Overflow No overflow Equal Not equal Greater than or equal Less than Greater than Less than or equal Unsigned greater than or equal Unsigned less than Unsigned greater than Unsigned less than or equal - - C=1 C=0 Z=1 Z=0 S=0 S=1 V=1 V=0 Z=1 Z=0
Flags Set
1111 (note) 0110 (note) 1110 (note) 1101 0101 0100 1100 0110 1110 1001 0001 1010 0010 1111 1011 0011
(note) (note) (note)
EQ NE GE LT GT LE UGE ULT UGT ULE
(S XOR V) = 0 (S XOR V) = 1 (Z OR (S XOR V)) = 0 (Z OR (S XOR V)) = 1 C=0 C=1 (C = 0 AND Z = 0) = 1 (C OR Z) = 1
0111 (note)
NOTES: 1. It indicates condition codes that are related to two different mnemonics but which test the same flag. For example, Z and EQ are both true if the zero flag (Z) is set, but after an ADD instruction, Z would probably be used; after a CP instruction, however, EQ would probably be used. 2. For operations involving unsigned numbers, the special condition codes UGE, ULT, UGT, and ULE must be used.
6-12
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTIONS This section contains detailed information and programming examples for each instruction in the SAM8 instruction set. Information is arranged in a consistent format for improved readability and for fast referencing. The following information is included in each instruction description: -- Instruction name (mnemonic) -- Full instruction name -- Source/destination format of the instruction operand -- Shorthand notation of the instruction's operation -- Textual description of the instruction's effect -- Specific flag settings affected by the instruction -- Detailed description of the instruction's format, execution time, and addressing mode(s) -- Programming example(s) explaining how to use the instruction
6-13
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
ADC -- Add with carry
ADC Operation: dst,src dst dst + src + c The source operand, along with the setting of the carry flag, is added to the destination operand and the sum is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Two'scomplement addition is performed. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the carry from the addition of low-order operands to be carried into the addition of high-order operands. Flags: C: Z: S: V: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurs, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the result is of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise. D: Always cleared to "0". H: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result; cleared otherwise. Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 12 13 14 15 16 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM
Format:
Examples:
Given: R1 = 10H, R2 = 03H, C flag = "1", register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0AH: ADC ADC ADC ADC ADC R1,R2 R1,@R2 01H,02H 01H,@02H 01H,#11H R1 = 14H, R2 = 03H R1 = 1BH, R2 = 03H Register 01H = 24H, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 2BH, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 32H
In the first example, destination register R1 contains the value 10H, the carry flag is set to "1", and the source working register R2 contains the value 03H. The statement "ADC R1,R2" adds 03H and the carry flag value ("1") to the destination value 10H, leaving 14H in register R1.
6-14
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
ADD
ADD
-- Add
dst,src dst dst + src The source operand is added to the destination operand and the sum is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Two's-complement addition is performed.
Operation:
Flags:
C: Z: S: V:
Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the result is of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise. D: Always cleared to "0". H: Set if a carry from the low-order nibble occurred.
Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 02 03 04 05 06 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH: ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD R1,R2 R1,@R2 01H,02H 01H,@02H 01H,#25H R1 = 15H, R2 = 03H R1 = 1CH, R2 = 03H Register 01H = 24H, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 2BH, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 46H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains 12H and the source working register R2 contains 03H. The statement "ADD R1,R2" adds 03H to 12H, leaving the value 15H in register R1.
6-15
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
AND
AND
-- Logical AND
dst,src dst dst AND src The source operand is logically ANDed with the destination operand. The result is stored in the destination. The AND operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever the corresponding bits in the two operands are both logic ones; otherwise a "0" bit value is stored. The contents of the source are unaffected.
Operation:
Flags:
C: Z: S: V: D: H:
Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always cleared to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 52 53 54 55 56 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH: AND AND AND AND AND R1,R2 R1,@R2 01H,02H 01H,@02H 01H,#25H R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H Register 01H = 01H, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 00H, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 21H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 12H and the source working register R2 contains 03H. The statement "AND R1,R2" logically ANDs the source operand 03H with the destination operand value 12H, leaving the value 02H in register R1.
6-16
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
BAND
BAND BAND Operation:
-- Bit AND
dst,src.b dst.b,src dst(0) dst(0) AND src(b) or dst(b) dst(b) AND src(0) The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ANDed with the zero bit (LSB) of the destination (or source). The resultant bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C: Z: S: V: D: H:
Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Cleared to "0". Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc opc
dst | b | 0
Cycles 6 6
Opcode (Hex) 67 67
Addr Mode dst src r0 Rb Rb r0
src dst
3 3
src | b | 1
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 05H: BAND R1,01H.1 BAND 01H.1,R1 R1 = 06H, register 01H = 05H Register 01H = 05H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, source register 01H contains the value 05H (00000101B) and destination working register R1 contains 07H (00000111B). The statement "BAND R1,01H.1" ANDs the bit 1 value of the source register ("0") with the bit 0 value of register R1 (destination), leaving the value 06H (00000110B) in register R1.
6-17
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
BCP -- Bit Compare
BCP Operation: dst,src.b dst(0) - src(b) The specified bit of the source is compared to (subtracted from) bit zero (LSB) of the destination. The zero flag is set if the bits are the same; otherwise it is cleared. The contents of both operands are unaffected by the comparison. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the two bits are the same; cleared otherwise. Cleared to "0". Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc
dst | b | 0
Cycles 6
Opcode (Hex) 17
Addr Mode dst src r0 Rb
src
3
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 01H: BCP R1,01H.1 R1 = 07H, register 01H = 01H
If destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and the source register 01H contains the value 01H (00000001B), the statement "BCP R1,01H.1" compares bit one of the source register (01H) and bit zero of the destination register (R1). Because the bit values are not identical, the zero flag bit (Z) is cleared in the FLAGS register (0D5H).
6-18
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
BITC
BITC
-- Bit Complement
dst.b dst(b) NOT dst(b) This instruction complements the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits in the destination.
Operation:
Flags:
C: Z: S: V: D: H:
Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Cleared to "0". Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc
dst | b | 0
Cycles 4
Opcode (Hex) 57
Addr Mode dst rb
2
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H BITC R1.1 R1 = 05H
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITC R1.1" complements bit one of the destination and leaves the value 05H (00000101B) in register R1. Because the result of the complement is not "0", the zero flag (Z) in the FLAGS register (0D5H) is cleared.
6-19
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
BITR -- Bit Reset
BITR Operation: dst.b dst(b) 0 The BITR instruction clears the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits in the destination. Flags: Format: Bytes opc
dst | b | 0
No flags are affected.
Cycles 4
Opcode (Hex) 77
Addr Mode dst rb
2
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H: BITR R1.1 R1 = 05H
If the value of working register R1 is 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITR R1.1" clears bit one of the destination register R1, leaving the value 05H (00000101B).
6-20
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
BITS -- Bit Set
BITS Operation: dst.b dst(b) 1 The BITS instruction sets the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits in the destination. Flags: Format: Bytes opc
dst | b | 1
No flags are affected.
Cycles 4
Opcode (Hex) 77
Addr Mode dst rb
2
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H: BITS R1.3 R1 = 0FH
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITS R1.3" sets bit three of the destination register R1 to "1", leaving the value 0FH (00001111B).
6-21
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
BOR -- Bit OR
BOR BOR Operation: dst,src.b dst.b,src dst(0) dst(0) OR src(b) or dst(b) dst(b) OR src(0) The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ORed with bit zero (LSB) of the destination (or the source). The resulting bit value is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Cleared to "0". Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc opc
dst | b | 0
Cycles 6 6
Opcode (Hex) 07 07
Addr Mode dst src r0 Rb Rb r0
src dst
3 3
src | b | 1
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 03H: BOR BOR R1, 01H.1 01H.2, R1 R1 = 07H, register 01H = 03H Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and source register 01H the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BOR R1,01H.1" logically ORs bit one of register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). This leaves the same value (07H) in working register R1. In the second example, destination register 01H contains the value 03H (00000011B) and the source working register R1 the value 07H (00000111B). The statement "BOR 01H.2,R1" logically ORs bit two of register 01H (destination) with bit zero of R1 (source). This leaves the value 07H in register 01H.
6-22
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
BTJRF
BTJRF Operation:
-- Bit Test, Jump Relative on False
dst,src.b If src(b) is a "0", then PC PC + dst The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "0", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC; otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRF instruction is executed.
Flags: Format:
No flags are affected.
Bytes
(Note 1)
Cycles 10
Opcode (Hex) 37
Addr Mode dst src RA rb
opc
src | b | 0
dst
3
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H: BTJRF SKIP,R1.3 PC jumps to SKIP location
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRF SKIP,R1.3" tests bit 3. Because it is "0", the relative address is added to the PC and the PC jumps to the memory location pointed to by the SKIP. (Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to - 128.)
6-23
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
BTJRT -- Bit Test, Jump Relative on True
BTJRT Operation: dst,src.b If src(b) is a "1", then PC PC + dst The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "1", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC; otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRT instruction is executed. Flags: Format: Bytes
(Note 1)
No flags are affected.
Cycles 10
Opcode (Hex) 37
Addr Mode dst src RA rb
opc
src | b | 1
dst
3
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H: BTJRT SKIP,R1.1
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRT SKIP,R1.1" tests bit one in the source register (R1). Because it is a "1", the relative address is added to the PC and the PC jumps to the memory location pointed to by the SKIP. (Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to - 128.)
6-24
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
BXOR -- Bit XOR
BXOR BXOR Operation: dst,src.b dst.b,src dst(0) dst(0) XOR src(b) or dst(b) dst(b) XOR src(0) The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically exclusive-ORed with bit zero (LSB) of the destination (or source). The result bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Cleared to "0". Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc opc
dst | b | 0
Cycles 6 6
Opcode (Hex) 27 27
Addr Mode dst src r0 Rb Rb r0
src dst
3 3
src | b | 1
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H (00000111B) and register 01H = 03H (00000011B): BXOR R1,01H.1 BXOR 01H.2,R1 R1 = 06H, register 01H = 03H Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, destination working register R1 has the value 07H (00000111B) and source register 01H has the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BXOR R1,01H.1" exclusive-ORs bit one of register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). The result bit value is stored in bit zero of R1, changing its value from 07H to 06H. The value of source register 01H is unaffected.
6-25
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
CALL -- Call Procedure
CALL Operation: dst SP @SP SP @SP PC SP - 1 PCL SP -1 PCH dst
The current contents of the program counter are pushed onto the top of the stack. The program counter value used is the address of the first instruction following the CALL instruction. The specified destination address is then loaded into the program counter and points to the first instruction of a procedure. At the end of the procedure the return instruction (RET) can be used to return to the original program flow. RET pops the top of the stack back into the program counter. Flags: Format: Bytes opc opc opc dst dst dst 3 2 2 Cycles 14 12 14 Opcode (Hex) F6 F4 D4 Addr Mode dst DA IRR IA No flags are affected.
Examples:
Given: R0 = 35H, R1 = 21H, PC = 1A47H, and SP = 0002H: CALL 3521H SP = 0000H (Memory locations 0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 4AH, where 4AH is the address that follows the instruction.) CALL CALL @RR0 #40H SP = 0000H (0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 49H) SP = 0000H (0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 49H)
In the first example, if the program counter value is 1A47H and the stack pointer contains the value 0002H, the statement "CALL 3521H" pushes the current PC value onto the top of the stack. The stack pointer now points to memory location 0000H. The PC is then loaded with the value 3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed. If the contents of the program counter and stack pointer are the same as in the first example, the statement "CALL @RR0" produces the same result except that the 49H is stored in stack location 0001H (because the two-byte instruction format was used). The PC is then loaded with the value 3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed. Assuming that the contents of the program counter and stack pointer are the same as in the first example, if program address 0040H contains 35H and program address 0041H contains 21H, the statement "CALL #40H" produces the same result as in the second example.
6-26
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
CCF -- Complement Carry Flag
CCF Operation: C NOT C The carry flag (C) is complemented. If C = "1", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic zero; if C = "0", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic one. Flags: C: Complemented. No other flags are affected. Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) EF
Example:
Given: The carry flag = "0": CCF If the carry flag = "0", the CCF instruction complements it in the FLAGS register (0D5H), changing its value from logic zero to logic one.
6-27
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
CLR -- Clear
CLR Operation: dst dst "0" The destination location is cleared to "0". Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) B0 B1 Addr Mode dst R IR No flags are affected.
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 4FH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 5EH: CLR CLR 00H Register 00H = 00H Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 00H
@01H
In Register (R) addressing mode, the statement "CLR 00H" clears the destination register 00H value to 00H. In the second example, the statement "CLR @01H" uses Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to clear the 02H register value to 00H.
6-28
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
COM -- Complement
COM Operation: dst dst NOT dst The contents of the destination location are complemented (one's complement); all "1s" are changed to "0s", and vice-versa. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always reset to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) 60 61 Addr Mode dst R IR
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 07H = 0F1H: COM COM R1 @R1 R1 = 0F8H R1 = 07H, register 07H = 0EH
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B). The statement "COM R1" complements all the bits in R1: all logic ones are changed to logic zeros, and vice-versa, leaving the value 0F8H (11111000B). In the second example, Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode is used to complement the value of destination register 07H (11110001B), leaving the new value 0EH (00001110B).
6-29
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
CP -- Compare
CP Operation: dst,src dst - src The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand, and the appropriate flags are set accordingly. The contents of both operands are unaffected by the comparison. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Set if a "borrow" occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM
Examples:
1. Given: R1 = 02H and R2 = 03H: CP R1,R2 Set the C and S flags
Destination working register R1 contains the value 02H and source register R2 contains the value 03H. The statement "CP R1,R2" subtracts the R2 value (source/subtrahend) from the R1 value (destination/minuend). Because a "borrow" occurs and the difference is negative, C and S are "1". 2. Given: R1 = 05H and R2 = 0AH: CP JP INC LD R1,R2 UGE,SKIP R1 R3,R1
SKIP
In this example, destination working register R1 contains the value 05H which is less than the contents of the source working register R2 (0AH). The statement "CP R1,R2" generates C = "1" and the JP instruction does not jump to the SKIP location. After the statement "LD R3,R1" executes, the value 06H remains in working register R3.
6-30
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
CPIJE -- Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal
CPIJE Operation: dst,src,RA If dst - src = "0", PC PC + RA Ir Ir + 1 The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is "0", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the program counter. Otherwise, the instruction immediately following the CPIJE instruction is executed. In either case, the source pointer is incremented by one before the next instruction is executed. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src dst RA 3 Cycles 12 Opcode (Hex) C2 Addr Mode dst src r Ir No flags are affected.
NOTE: Execution time is 18 cycles if the jump is taken or 16 cycles if it is not taken.
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H, and register 03H = 02H: CPIJE R1,@R2,SKIP R2 = 04H, PC jumps to SKIP location
In this example, working register R1 contains the value 02H, working register R2 the value 03H, and register 03 contains 02H. The statement "CPIJE R1,@R2,SKIP" compares the @R2 value 02H (00000010B) to 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is equal, the relative address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by SKIP. The source register (R2) is incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H. (Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to - 128.)
6-31
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
CPIJNE -- Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal
CPIJNE Operation: dst,src,RA If dst - src "0", PC PC + RA Ir Ir + 1 The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is not "0", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the program counter; otherwise the instruction following the CPIJNE instruction is executed. In either case the source pointer is incremented by one before the next instruction. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src dst RA 3 Cycles 12 Opcode (Hex) D2 Addr Mode dst src r Ir No flags are affected.
NOTE: Execution time is 18 cycles if the jump is taken or 16 cycles if it is not taken.
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H, and register 03H = 04H: CPIJNE R1,@R2,SKIP R2 = 04H, PC jumps to SKIP location
Working register R1 contains the value 02H, working register R2 (the source pointer) the value 03H, and general register 03 the value 04H. The statement "CPIJNE R1,@R2,SKIP" subtracts 04H (00000100B) from 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is non-equal, the relative address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by SKIP. The source pointer register (R2) is also incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H. (Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to - 128.)
6-32
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
DA -- Decimal Adjust
DA Operation: dst dst DA dst The destination operand is adjusted to form two 4-bit BCD digits following an addition or subtraction operation. For addition (ADD, ADC) or subtraction (SUB, SBC), the following table indicates the operation performed. (The operation is undefined if the destination operand was not the result of a valid addition or subtraction of BCD digits): Instruction Carry Before DA 0 0 0 ADD ADC 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 SUB SBC 0 1 1 Bits 4-7 Value (Hex) 0-9 0-8 0-9 A-F 9-F A-F 0-2 0-2 0-3 0-9 0-8 7-F 6-F H Flag Before DA 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Bits 0-3 Value (Hex) 0-9 A-F 0-3 0-9 A-F 0-3 0-9 A-F 0-3 0-9 6-F 0-9 6-F Number Added to Byte 00 06 06 60 66 66 60 66 66 00 = - 00 FA = - 06 A0 = - 60 9A = - 66 Carry After DA 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
Flags:
C: Z: S: V: D: H:
Set if there was a carry from the most significant bit; cleared otherwise (see table). Set if result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) 40 41 Addr Mode dst R IR
6-33
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
DA -- Decimal Adjust
DA Example: (Continued) Given: Working register R0 contains the value 15 (BCD), working register R1 contains 27 (BCD), and address 27H contains 46 (BCD): ADD DA R1,R0 R1 ; ; C "0", H "0", Bits 4-7 = 3, bits 0-3 = C, R1 3CH R1 3CH + 06
If addition is performed using the BCD values 15 and 27, the result should be 42. The sum is incorrect, however, when the binary representations are added in the destination location using standard binary arithmetic: 0001 + 0010 0011 0101 0111 1100 = 15 27 3CH
The DA instruction adjusts this result so that the correct BCD representation is obtained: 0011 + 0000 0100 1100 0110 0010 = 42
Assuming the same values given above, the statements SUB DA 27H,R0 ; @R1 ; C "0", H "0", Bits 4-7 = 3, bits 0-3 = 1 @R1 31-0
leave the value 31 (BCD) in address 27H (@R1).
6-34
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
DEC -- Decrement
DEC Operation: dst dst dst - 1 The contents of the destination operand are decremented by one. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) 00 01 Addr Mode dst R IR
Examples:
Given: R1 = 03H and register 03H = 10H: DEC DEC R1 @R1 R1 = 02H Register 03H = 0FH
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 03H, the statement "DEC R1" decrements the hexadecimal value by one, leaving the value 02H. In the second example, the statement "DEC @R1" decrements the value 10H contained in the destination register 03H by one, leaving the value 0FH.
6-35
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
DECW -- Decrement Word
DECW Operation: dst dst dst - 1 The contents of the destination location (which must be an even address) and the operand following that location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is decremented by one. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 8 8 Opcode (Hex) 80 81 Addr Mode dst RR IR
Examples:
Given: R0 = 12H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 30H, register 30H = 0FH, and register 31H = 21H: DECW RR0 DECW @R2 R0 = 12H, R1 = 33H Register 30H = 0FH, register 31H = 20H
In the first example, destination register R0 contains the value 12H and register R1 the value 34H. The statement "DECW RR0" addresses R0 and the following operand R1 as a 16-bit word and decrements the value of R1 by one, leaving the value 33H. NOTE: A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero flag (FLAGS.6) result together with a DECW instruction. To avoid this problem, we recommend that you use DECW as shown in the following example: LOOP: DECW RR0 LD OR JR R2,R1 R2,R0 NZ,LOOP
6-36
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
DI -- Disable Interrupts
DI Operation: SYM (0) 0 Bit zero of the system mode control register, SYM.0, is cleared to "0", globally disabling all interrupt processing. Interrupt requests will continue to set their respective interrupt pending bits, but the CPU will not service them while interrupt processing is disabled. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 8F No flags are affected.
Example:
Given: SYM = 01H: DI If the value of the SYM register is 01H, the statement "DI" leaves the new value 00H in the register and clears SYM.0 to "0", disabling interrupt processing. Before changing IMR, interrupt pending and interrupt source control register, be sure DI state.
6-37
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
DIV -- Divide (Unsigned)
DIV Operation: dst,src dst / src dst (UPPER) REMAINDER dst (LOWER) QUOTIENT The destination operand (16 bits) is divided by the source operand (8 bits). The quotient (8 bits) is stored in the lower half of the destination. The remainder (8 bits) is stored in the upper half of the destination. When the quotient is 28, the numbers stored in the upper and lower halves of the destination for quotient and remainder are incorrect. Both operands are treated as unsigned integers. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Set if the V flag is set and quotient is between 28 and 29 -1; cleared otherwise. Set if divisor or quotient = "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if MSB of quotient = "1"; cleared otherwise. Set if quotient is 28 or if divisor = "0"; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc src dst 3 Cycles 26/10 26/10 26/10
NOTE: Execution takes 10 cycles if the divide-by-zero is attempted; otherwise it takes 26 cycles.
Opcode (Hex) 94 95 96
Addr Mode dst src RR RR RR R IR IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 10H, R1 = 03H, R2 = 40H, register 40H = 80H: DIV DIV DIV RR0,R2 RR0,@R2 RR0,#20H R0 = 03H, R1 = 40H R0 = 03H, R1 = 20H R0 = 03H, R1 = 80H
In the first example, destination working register pair RR0 contains the values 10H (R0) and 03H (R1), and register R2 contains the value 40H. The statement "DIV RR0,R2" divides the 16-bit RR0 value by the 8-bit value of the R2 (source) register. After the DIV instruction, R0 contains the value 03H and R1 contains 40H. The 8-bit remainder is stored in the upper half of the destination register RR0 (R0) and the quotient in the lower half (R1).
6-38
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
DJNZ -- Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero
DJNZ Operation: r,dst rr-1 If r 0, PC PC + dst The working register being used as a counter is decremented. If the contents of the register are not logic zero after decrementing, the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC. The range of the relative address is +127 to -128, and the original value of the PC is taken to be the address of the instruction byte following the DJNZ statement.
NOTE: In case of using DJNZ instruction, the working register being used as a counter should be set at the one of location 0C0H to 0CFH with SRP, SRP0, or SRP1 instruction.
Flags: Format:
No flags are affected.
Bytes r | opc dst 2
Cycles 8 (jump taken) 8 (no jump)
Opcode (Hex) rA r = 0 to F
Addr Mode dst RA
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H and LOOP is the label of a relative address: SRP DJNZ #0C0H R1,LOOP
DJNZ is typically used to control a "loop" of instructions. In many cases, a label is used as the destination operand instead of a numeric relative address value. In the example, working register R1 contains the value 02H, and LOOP is the label for a relative address. The statement "DJNZ R1, LOOP" decrements register R1 by one, leaving the value 01H. Because the contents of R1 after the decrement are non-zero, the jump is taken to the relative address specified by the LOOP label.
6-39
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
EI -- Enable Interrupts
EI Operation: SYM (0) 1 An EI instruction sets bit zero of the system mode register, SYM.0 to "1". This allows interrupts to be serviced as they occur (assuming they have highest priority). If an interrupt's pending bit was set while interrupt processing was disabled (by executing a DI instruction), it will be serviced when you execute the EI instruction. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 9F No flags are affected.
Example:
Given: SYM = 00H: EI If the SYM register contains the value 00H, that is, if interrupts are currently disabled, the statement "EI" sets the SYM register to 01H, enabling all interrupts. (SYM.0 is the enable bit for global interrupt processing.)
6-40
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
ENTER -- Enter
ENTER Operation: SP @SP IP PC IP SP - 2 IP PC @IP IP + 2
This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The contents of the instruction pointer are pushed to the stack. The program counter (PC) value is then written to the instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is loaded into the PC, and the instruction pointer is incremented by two. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 14 Opcode (Hex) 1F No flags are affected.
Example:
The diagram below shows one example of how to use an ENTER statement.
Before Address IP 0050 Address PC 0040 40 41 42 43 Enter Address H Address L Address H Data 1F 01 10 PC 0110 Data Address IP 0043
After Data
Address 40 41 42 43 Enter Address H Address L Address H
Data 1F 01 10
SP
0022
SP
0020
22
Data Stack
Memory
20 21 22
IPH IPL Data Stack
00 50
110
Routine Memory
6-41
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
EXIT -- Exit
EXIT Operation: IP SP PC IP @SP SP + 2 @IP IP + 2
This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The stack value is popped and loaded into the instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is then loaded into the program counter, and the instruction pointer is incremented by two. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 14 (internal stack) 16 (internal stack) Opcode (Hex) 2F No flags are affected.
Example:
The diagram below shows one example of how to use an EXIT statement.
Before Address IP 0050 Address PC 0040 50 51 SP 0022 140 20 21 22 IPH IPL Data Stack 00 50 Exit 2F PCL old PCH 60 00 SP 0022 Data PC 0060 Data Address IP 0052
After Data
Address 60 Main
Data
Memory
22
Data Stack
Memory
6-42
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
IDLE -- Idle Operation
IDLE Operation: The IDLE instruction stops the CPU clock while allowing system clock oscillation to continue. Idle mode can be released by an interrupt request (IRQ) or an external reset operation. In application programs, a IDLE instruction must be immediately followed by at least three NOP instructions. This ensures an adeguate time interval for the clock to stabilize before the next instruction is executed. If three or more NOP instructons are not used after IDLE instruction, leakage current could be flown because of the floating state in the internal bus. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 6F Addr Mode dst src - - No flags are affected.
Example:
The instruction IDLE NOP NOP NOP ; stops the CPU clock but not the system clock
6-43
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
INC -- Increment
INC Operation: dst dst dst + 1 The contents of the destination operand are incremented by one. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes dst | opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) rE r = 0 to F opc dst 2 4 4 20 21 R IR Addr Mode dst r
Examples:
Given: R0 = 1BH, register 00H = 0CH, and register 1BH = 0FH: INC INC INC R0 00H @R0 R0 = 1CH Register 00H = 0DH R0 = 1BH, register 01H = 10H
In the first example, if destination working register R0 contains the value 1BH, the statement "INC R0" leaves the value 1CH in that same register. The next example shows the effect an INC instruction has on register 00H, assuming that it contains the value 0CH. In the third example, INC is used in Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the value of register 1BH from 0FH to 10H.
6-44
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
INCW -- Increment Word
INCW Operation: dst dst dst + 1 The contents of the destination (which must be an even address) and the byte following that location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is incremented by one. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 8 8 Opcode (Hex) A0 A1 Addr Mode dst RR IR
Examples:
Given: R0 = 1AH, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 0FH, and register 03H = 0FFH: INCW RR0 INCW @R1 R0 = 1AH, R1 = 03H Register 02H = 10H, register 03H = 00H
In the first example, the working register pair RR0 contains the value 1AH in register R0 and 02H in register R1. The statement "INCW RR0" increments the 16-bit destination by one, leaving the value 03H in register R1. In the second example, the statement "INCW @R1" uses Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the contents of general register 03H from 0FFH to 00H and register 02H from 0FH to 10H. NOTE: A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero (Z) flag (FLAGS.6) result together with an INCW instruction. To avoid this problem, we recommend that you use INCW as shown in the following example: LOOP: INCW LD OR JR RR0 R2,R1 R2,R0 NZ,LOOP
6-45
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
IRET -- Interrupt Return
IRET Operation: IRET (Normal) FLAGS @SP SP SP + 1 PC @SP SP SP + 2 SYM(0) 1 IRET (Fast) PC IP FLAGS FLAGS' FIS 0
This instruction is used at the end of an interrupt service routine. It restores the flag register and the program counter. It also re-enables global interrupts. A "normal IRET" is executed only if the fast interrupt status bit (FIS, bit one of the FLAGS register, 0D5H) is cleared (= "0"). If a fast interrupt occurred, IRET clears the FIS bit that was set at the beginning of the service routine. Flags: Format: IRET (Normal) opc Bytes 1 Cycles 10 (internal stack) 12 (internal stack) IRET (Fast) opc Bytes 1 Cycles 6 Opcode (Hex) BF Opcode (Hex) BF All flags are restored to their original settings (that is, the settings before the interrupt occurred).
Example:
In the figure below, the instruction pointer is initially loaded with 100H in the main program before interrupts are enabled. When an interrupt occurs, the program counter and instruction pointer are swapped. This causes the PC to jump to address 100H and the IP to keep the return address. The last instruction in the service routine normally is a jump to IRET at address FFH. This causes the instruction pointer to be loaded with 100H "again" and the program counter to jump back to the main program. Now, the next interrupt can occur and the IP is still correct at 100H.
0H FFH 100H IRET Interrupt Service Routine JP to FFH FFFFH
NOTE:
In the fast interrupt example above, if the last instruction is not a jump to IRET, you must pay attention to the order of the last two instructions. The IRET cannot be immediately proceeded by a clearing of the interrupt status (as with a reset of the IPR register).
6-46
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
JP -- Jump
JP JP Operation: cc,dst dst (Conditional) (Unconditional)
If cc is true, PC dst The conditional JUMP instruction transfers program control to the destination address if the condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true; otherwise, the instruction following the JP instruction is executed. The unconditional JP simply replaces the contents of the PC with the contents of the specified register pair. Control then passes to the statement addressed by the PC.
Flags: Format: (1)
No flags are affected.
Bytes
(2)
Cycles 8
Opcode (Hex) ccD cc = 0 to F
Addr Mode dst DA
cc | opc
dst
3
opc
dst
2
8
30
IRR
NOTES: 1. The 3-byte format is used for a conditional jump and the 2-byte format for an unconditional jump. 2. In the first byte of the three-byte instruction format (conditional jump), the condition code and the opcode are both four bits.
Examples:
Given: The carry flag (C) = "1", register 00 = 01H, and register 01 = 20H: JP JP C,LABEL_W @00H LABEL_W = 1000H, PC = 1000H PC = 0120H
The first example shows a conditional JP. Assuming that the carry flag is set to "1", the statement "JP C,LABEL_W" replaces the contents of the PC with the value 1000H and transfers control to that location. Had the carry flag not been set, control would then have passed to the statement immediately following the JP instruction. The second example shows an unconditional JP. The statement "JP @00" replaces the contents of the PC with the contents of the register pair 00H and 01H, leaving the value 0120H.
6-47
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
JR -- Jump Relative
JR Operation: cc,dst If cc is true, PC PC + dst If the condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true, the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the program counter; otherwise, the instruction following the JR instruction is executed. (See list of condition codes). The range of the relative address is +127, -128, and the original value of the program counter is taken to be the address of the first instruction byte following the JR statement. Flags: Format: Bytes
(1)
No flags are affected.
Cycles 6
Opcode (Hex) ccB cc = 0 to F
Addr Mode dst RA
cc | opc
dst
2
NOTE: In the first byte of the two-byte instruction format, the condition code and the opcode are each four bits.
Example:
Given: The carry flag = "1" and LABEL_X = 1FF7H: JR C,LABEL_X PC = 1FF7H
If the carry flag is set (that is, if the condition code is true), the statement "JR C,LABEL_X" will pass control to the statement whose address is now in the PC. Otherwise, the program instruction following the JR would be executed.
6-48
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
LD -- Load
LD Operation: dst,src dst src The contents of the source are loaded into the destination. The source's contents are unaffected. Flags: Format: Bytes dst | opc src 2 Cycles 4 4 src | opc dst 2 4 Opcode (Hex) rC r8 r9 r = 0 to F opc dst | src 2 4 4 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 6 opc opc opc src dst | src src | dst dst x x 3 3 3 6 6 6 C7 D7 E4 E5 E6 D6 F5 87 97 r Ir R R R IR IR r x [r] lr r R IR IM IM R x [r] r Addr Mode dst src r r R IM R r No flags are affected.
6-49
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
LD -- Load
LD Examples: (Continued) Given: R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 02H, LOOP = 30H, and register 3AH = 0FFH: LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LD R0,#10H R0,01H 01H,R0 R1,@R0 @R0,R1 00H,01H 02H,@00H 00H,#0AH @00H,#10H @00H,02H R0 = 10H R0 = 20H, register 01H = 20H Register 01H = 01H, R0 = 01H R1 = 20H, R0 = 01H R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, register 01H = 0AH Register 00H = 20H, register 01H = 20H Register 02H = 20H, register 00H = 01H Register 00H = 0AH Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 10H Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 02, register 02H = 02H R0 = 0FFH, R1 = 0AH Register 31H = 0AH, R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH
R0,#LOOP[R1] #LOOP[R0],R1
6-50
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
LDB -- Load Bit
LDB LDB Operation: dst,src.b dst.b,src dst(0) src(b) or dst(b) src(0) The specified bit of the source is loaded into bit zero (LSB) of the destination, or bit zero of the source is loaded into the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected. Flags: Format: Bytes opc opc
dst | b | 0
No flags are affected.
Cycles 6 6
Opcode (Hex) 47 47
Addr Mode dst src r0 Rb Rb r0
src dst
3 3
src | b | 1
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address 'b' is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R0 = 06H and general register 00H = 05H: LDB LDB R0,00H.2 00H.0,R0 R0 = 07H, register 00H = 05H R0 = 06H, register 00H = 04H
In the first example, destination working register R0 contains the value 06H and the source general register 00H the value 05H. The statement "LD R0,00H.2" loads the bit two value of the 00H register into bit zero of the R0 register, leaving the value 07H in register R0. In the second example, 00H is the destination register. The statement "LD 00H.0,R0" loads bit zero of register R0 to the specified bit (bit zero) of the destination register, leaving 04H in general register 00H.
6-51
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
LDC/LDE -- Load Memory
LDC/LDE Operation: dst,src dst src This instruction loads a byte from program or data memory into a working register or vice-versa. The source values are unaffected. LDC refers to program memory and LDE to data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr' or 'rr' values an even number for program memory and odd an odd number for data memory. Flags: Format: Bytes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. opc opc opc opc opc opc opc opc opc opc
dst | src src | dst dst | src src | dst dst | src 2 2
No flags are affected.
Cycles
10 10 12 12 14
Opcode (Hex)
C3 D3 E7 F7 A7
Addr Mode dst src
r Irr r XS [rr] r Irr r XS [rr] r XL [rr]
XS XS XLL XLL DAL DAL DAL DAL XLH XLH DAH DAH DAH DAH
3 3 4
src | dst
4
14
B7
XL [rr]
r
dst | 0000
4
14
A7
r
DA
src | 0000
4
14
B7
DA
r
dst | 0001
4
14
A7
r
DA
src | 0001
4
14
B7
DA
r
NOTES: 1. The source (src) or working register pair [rr] for formats 5 and 6 cannot use register pair 0-1. 2. For formats 3 and 4, the destination address 'XS [rr]' and the source address 'XS [rr]' are each one byte. 3. For formats 5 and 6, the destination address 'XL [rr] and the source address 'XL [rr]' are each two bytes. 4. The DA and r source values for formats 7 and 8 are used to address program memory; the second set of values, used in formats 9 and 10, are used to address data memory.
6-52
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
LDC/LDE -- Load Memory
LDC/LDE Examples: (Continued) Given: R0 = 11H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H; Program memory locations 0103H = 4FH, 0104H = 1A, 0105H = 6DH, and 1104H = 88H. External data memory locations 0103H = 5FH, 0104H = 2AH, 0105H = 7DH, and 1104H = 98H: LDC LDE R0,@RR2 R0,@RR2 ; R0 contents of program memory location 0104H ; R0 = 1AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H ; R0 contents of external data memory location 0104H ; R0 = 2AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory ; location 0104H (RR2), ; working registers R0, R2, R3 no change ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory ; location 0104H (RR2), ; working registers R0, R2, R3 no change ; R0 contents of program memory location 0105H ; (01H + RR2), ; R0 = 6DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H ; R0 contents of external data memory location 0105H ; (01H + RR2), R0 = 7DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location ; 0105H (01H + 0104H) ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory ; location 0105H (01H + 0104H)
LDC (note) @RR2,R0
LDE
@RR2,R0
LDC
R0,#01H[RR2]
LDE
R0,#01H[RR2]
LDC (note) #01H[RR2],R0 LDE LDC LDE LDC LDE #01H[RR2],R0
R0,#1000H[RR2] ; R0 contents of program memory location 1104H ; (1000H + 0104H), R0 = 88H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H R0,#1000H[RR2] ; R0 contents of external data memory location 1104H ; (1000H + 0104H), R0 = 98H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H R0,1104H R0,1104H ; R0 contents of program memory location 1104H, R0 = 88H ; R0 contents of external data memory location 1104H, ; R0 = 98H ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location ; 1105H, (1105H) 11H ; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory ; location 1105H, (1105H) 11H
LDC (note) 1105H,R0 LDE 1105H,R0
NOTE: These instructions are not supported by masked ROM type devices.
6-53
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
LDCD/LDED -- Load Memory and Decrement
LDCD/LDED Operation: dst,src dst src rr rr - 1 These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data memory to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory address is then decremented. The contents of the source are unaffected. LDCD references program memory and LDED references external data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 10 Opcode (Hex) E2 Addr Mode dst src r Irr No flags are affected.
Examples:
Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory location 1033H = 0CDH, and external data memory location 1033H = 0DDH: LDCD R8,@RR6 ; 0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is loaded ; into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one ; R8 = 0CDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 32H (RR6 RR6 - 1) LDED R8,@RR6 ; 0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is loaded ; into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one (RR6 RR6 - 1) ; R8 = 0DDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 32H
6-54
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
LDCI/LDEI -- Load Memory and Increment
LDCI/LDEI Operation: dst,src dst src rr rr + 1 These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data memory to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory address is then incremented automatically. The contents of the source are unaffected. LDCI refers to program memory and LDEI refers to external data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr' even for program memory and odd for data memory. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 10 Opcode (Hex) E3 Addr Mode dst src r Irr No flags are affected.
Examples:
Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory locations 1033H = 0CDH and 1034H = 0C5H; external data memory locations 1033H = 0DDH and 1034H = 0D5H: LDCI R8,@RR6 ; 0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is loaded ; into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one (RR6 RR6 + 1) ; R8 = 0CDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 34H LDEI R8,@RR6 ; 0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is loaded ; into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one (RR6 RR6 + 1) ; R8 = 0DDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 34H
6-55
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
LDCPD/LDEPD -- Load Memory with Pre-Decrement
LDCPD/ LDEPD Operation: dst,src rr rr - 1 dst src These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory from the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first decremented. The contents of the source location are then loaded into the destination location. The contents of the source are unaffected. LDCPD refers to program memory and LDEPD refers to external data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for external data memory. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src | dst 2 Cycles 14 Opcode (Hex) F2 Addr Mode dst src Irr r No flags are affected.
Examples:
Given: R0 = 77H, R6 = 30H, and R7 = 00H: LDCPD @RR6,R0 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; (RR6 RR6 - 1) 77H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location 2FFFH (3000H - 1H) R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH (RR6 RR6 - 1) 77H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory location 2FFFH (3000H - 1H) R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH
LDEPD
@RR6,R0
6-56
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
LDCPI/LDEPI -- Load Memory with Pre-Increment
LDCPI/ LDEPI Operation: dst,src rr rr + 1 dst src These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory from the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first incremented. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The contents of the source are unaffected. LDCPI refers to program memory and LDEPI refers to external data memory. The assembler makes 'Irr' an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src | dst 2 Cycles 14 Opcode (Hex) F3 Addr Mode dst src Irr r No flags are affected.
Examples:
Given: R0 = 7FH, R6 = 21H, and R7 = 0FFH: LDCPI @RR6,R0 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; (RR6 RR6 + 1) 7FH (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location 2200H (21FFH + 1H) R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H (RR6 RR6 + 1) 7FH (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory location 2200H (21FFH + 1H) R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H
LDEPI
@RR6,R0
6-57
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
LDW -- Load Word
LDW Operation: dst,src dst src The contents of the source (a word) are loaded into the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src dst 3 Cycles 8 8 opc dst src 4 8 Opcode (Hex) C4 C5 C6 Addr Mode dst src RR RR RR RR IR IML No flags are affected.
Examples:
Given: R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH, R6 = 05H, R7 = 02H, register 00H = 1AH, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0FH: LDW LDW LDW LDW LDW LDW RR6,RR4 00H,02H RR2,@R7 04H,@01H RR6,#1234H 02H,#0FEDH R6 = 06H, R7 = 1CH, R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 0FH, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0FH R2 = 03H, R3 = 0FH, Register 04H = 03H, register 05H = 0FH R6 = 12H, R7 = 34H Register 02H = 0FH, register 03H = 0EDH
In the second example, please note that the statement "LDW 00H,02H" loads the contents of the source word 02H, 03H into the destination word 00H, 01H. This leaves the value 03H in general register 00H and the value 0FH in register 01H. The other examples show how to use the LDW instruction with various addressing modes and formats.
6-58
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
MULT -- Multiply (Unsigned)
MULT Operation: dst,src dst dst x src The 8-bit destination operand (even register of the register pair) is multiplied by the source operand (8 bits) and the product (16 bits) is stored in the register pair specified by the destination address. Both operands are treated as unsigned integers. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Set if result is > 255; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if MSB of the result is a "1"; cleared otherwise. Cleared. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc src dst 3 Cycles 22 22 22 Opcode (Hex) 84 85 86 Addr Mode dst src RR RR RR R IR IM
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 20H, register 01H = 03H, register 02H = 09H, register 03H = 06H: MULT MULT MULT 00H, 02H 00H, @01H 00H, #30H Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 09H Register 00H = 00H, register 01H = 0C0H Register 00H = 06H, register 01H = 00H
In the first example, the statement "MULT 00H,02H" multiplies the 8-bit destination operand (in the register 00H of the register pair 00H, 01H) by the source register 02H operand (09H). The 16-bit product, 0120H, is stored in the register pair 00H, 01H.
6-59
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
NEXT -- Next
NEXT Operation: PC @ IP IP IP + 2 The NEXT instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The program memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is loaded into the program counter. The instruction pointer is then incremented by two. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 10 Opcode (Hex) 0F No flags are affected.
Example:
The following diagram shows one example of how to use the NEXT instruction.
Before Address IP 0043 Address PC 0120 43 44 45 Address H Address L Address H Data 01 10 PC 0130 Data Address IP 0045
After Data
Address 43 44 45 Address H Address L Address H
Data
120
Next Memory
130
Routine Memory
6-60
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
NOP -- No Operation
NOP Operation: Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) FF No action is performed when the CPU executes this instruction. Typically, one or more NOPs are executed in sequence in order to effect a timing delay of variable duration. No flags are affected.
Example:
When the instruction NOP is encountered in a program, no operation occurs. Instead, there is a delay in instruction execution time.
6-61
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
OR -- Logical OR
OR Operation: dst,src dst dst OR src The source operand is logically ORed with the destination operand and the result is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. The OR operation results in a "1" being stored whenever either of the corresponding bits in the two operands is a "1"; otherwise a "0" is stored. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always cleared to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 42 43 44 45 46 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 15H, R1 = 2AH, R2 = 01H, register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 37H, and register 08H = 8AH: OR OR OR OR OR R0,R1 R0,@R2 00H,01H 01H,@00H 00H,#02H R0 = 3FH, R1 = 2AH R0 = 37H, R2 = 01H, register 01H = 37H Register 00H = 3FH, register 01H = 37H Register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 0BFH Register 00H = 0AH
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 15H and register R1 the value 2AH, the statement "OR R0,R1" logical-ORs the R0 and R1 register contents and stores the result (3FH) in destination register R0. The other examples show the use of the logical OR instruction with the various addressing modes and formats.
6-62
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
POP -- Pop From Stack
POP Operation: dst dst @SP SP SP + 1 The contents of the location addressed by the stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The stack pointer is then incremented by one. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 8 8 Opcode (Hex) 50 51 Addr Mode dst R IR No flags affected.
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 1BH, SPH (0D8H) = 00H, SPL (0D9H) = 0FBH, and stack register 0FBH = 55H: POP POP 00H @00H Register 00H = 55H, SP = 00FCH Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 55H, SP = 00FCH
In the first example, general register 00H contains the value 01H. The statement "POP 00H" loads the contents of location 00FBH (55H) into destination register 00H and then increments the stack pointer by one. Register 00H then contains the value 55H and the SP points to location 00FCH.
6-63
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
POPUD -- Pop User Stack (Decrementing)
POPUD Operation: dst,src dst src IR IR - 1 This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the register file location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user stack pointer is then decremented. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src dst 3 Cycles 8 Opcode (Hex) 92 Addr Mode dst src R IR No flags are affected.
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 42H (user stack pointer register), register 42H = 6FH, and register 02H = 70H: POPUD 02H,@00H Register 00H = 41H, register 02H = 6FH, register 42H = 6FH
If general register 00H contains the value 42H and register 42H the value 6FH, the statement "POPUD 02H,@00H" loads the contents of register 42H into the destination register 02H. The user stack pointer is then decremented by one, leaving the value 41H.
6-64
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
POPUI -- Pop User Stack (Incrementing)
POPUI Operation: dst,src dst src IR IR + 1 The POPUI instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the register file location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user stack pointer is then incremented. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src dst 3 Cycles 8 Opcode (Hex) 93 Addr Mode dst src R IR No flags are affected.
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 01H and register 01H = 70H: POPUI 02H,@00H Register 00H = 02H, register 01H = 70H, register 02H = 70H
If general register 00H contains the value 01H and register 01H the value 70H, the statement "POPUI 02H,@00H" loads the value 70H into the destination general register 02H. The user stack pointer (register 00H) is then incremented by one, changing its value from 01H to 02H.
6-65
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
PUSH -- Push To Stack
PUSH Operation: src SP SP - 1 @SP src A PUSH instruction decrements the stack pointer value and loads the contents of the source (src) into the location addressed by the decremented stack pointer. The operation then adds the new value to the top of the stack. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src 2 Cycles 8 (internal clock) 8 (external clock) 8 (internal clock) 8 (external clock) 71 IR Opcode (Hex) 70 Addr Mode dst R No flags are affected.
Examples:
Given: Register 40H = 4FH, register 4FH = 0AAH, SPH = 00H, and SPL = 00H: PUSH PUSH 40H @40H Register 40H = 4FH, stack register 0FFH = 4FH, SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH Register 40H = 4FH, register 4FH = 0AAH, stack register 0FFH = 0AAH, SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH
In the first example, if the stack pointer contains the value 0000H, and general register 40H the value 4FH, the statement "PUSH 40H" decrements the stack pointer from 0000 to 0FFFFH. It then loads the contents of register 40H into location 0FFFFH and adds this new value to the top of the stack.
6-66
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
PUSHUD -- Push User Stack (Decrementing)
PUSHUD Operation: dst,src IR IR - 1 dst src This instruction is used to address user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUD decrements the user stack pointer and loads the contents of the source into the register addressed by the decremented stack pointer. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst src 3 Cycles 8 Opcode (Hex) 82 Addr Mode dst src IR R No flags are affected.
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 05H, and register 02H = 1AH: PUSHUD @00H,01H Register 00H = 02H, register 01H = 05H, register 02H = 05H
If the user stack pointer (register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement "PUSHUD @00H,01H" decrements the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 02H. The 01H register value, 05H, is then loaded into the register addressed by the decremented user stack pointer.
6-67
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
PUSHUI -- Push User Stack (Incrementing)
PUSHUI Operation: dst,src IR IR + 1 dst src This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUI increments the user stack pointer and then loads the contents of the source into the register location addressed by the incremented user stack pointer. Flags: Format: Bytes opc dst src 3 Cycles 8 Opcode (Hex) 83 Addr Mode dst src IR R No flags are affected.
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 05H, and register 04H = 2AH: PUSHUI @00H,01H Register 00H = 04H, register 01H = 05H, register 04H = 05H
If the user stack pointer (register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement "PUSHUI @00H,01H" increments the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 04H. The 01H register value, 05H, is then loaded into the location addressed by the incremented user stack pointer.
6-68
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
RCF -- Reset Carry Flag
RCF Operation: RCF C0 The carry flag is cleared to logic zero, regardless of its previous value. Flags: C: Cleared to "0".
No other flags are affected. Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) CF
Example:
Given: C = "1" or "0": The instruction RCF clears the carry flag (C) to logic zero.
6-69
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
RET -- Return
RET Operation: PC @SP SP SP + 2 The RET instruction is normally used to return to the previously executing procedure at the end of a procedure entered by a CALL instruction. The contents of the location addressed by the stack pointer are popped into the program counter. The next statement that is executed is the one that is addressed by the new program counter value. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 8 (internal stack) 10 (internal stack) Opcode (Hex) AF No flags are affected.
Example:
Given: SP = 00FCH, (SP) = 101AH, and PC = 1234: RET PC = 101AH, SP = 00FEH
The statement "RET" pops the contents of stack pointer location 00FCH (10H) into the high byte of the program counter. The stack pointer then pops the value in location 00FEH (1AH) into the PC's low byte and the instruction at location 101AH is executed. The stack pointer now points to memory location 00FEH.
6-70
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
RL -- Rotate Left
RL Operation: dst C dst (7) dst (0) dst (7) dst (n + 1) dst (n), n = 0-6 The contents of the destination operand are rotated left one bit position. The initial value of bit 7 is moved to the bit zero (LSB) position and also replaces the carry flag.
7 C
0
Flags:
C: Z: S: V: D: H:
Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1". Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) 90 91 Addr Mode dst R IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 0AAH, register 01H = 02H and register 02H = 17H: RL RL 00H @01H Register 00H = 55H, C = "1" Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 2EH, C = "0"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement "RL 00H" rotates the 0AAH value left one bit position, leaving the new value 55H (01010101B) and setting the carry and overflow flags.
6-71
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
RLC -- Rotate Left Through Carry
RLC Operation: dst dst (0) C C dst (7) dst (n + 1) dst (n), n = 0-6 The contents of the destination operand with the carry flag are rotated left one bit position. The initial value of bit 7 replaces the carry flag (C); the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit zero.
7 C
0
Flags:
Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1". Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during rotation; cleared otherwise. D: Unaffected. H: Unaffected.
C: Z: S: V:
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) 10 11 Addr Mode dst R IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 0AAH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 17H, C = "0": RLC RLC 00H @01H Register 00H = 54H, C = "1" Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 2EH, C = "0"
In the first example, if general register 00H has the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement "RLC 00H" rotates 0AAH one bit position to the left. The initial value of bit 7 sets the carry flag and the initial value of the C flag replaces bit zero of register 00H, leaving the value 55H (01010101B). The MSB of register 00H resets the carry flag to "1" and sets the overflow flag.
6-72
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
RR -- Rotate Right
RR Operation: dst C dst (0) dst (7) dst (0) dst (n) dst (n + 1), n = 0-6 The contents of the destination operand are rotated right one bit position. The initial value of bit zero (LSB) is moved to bit 7 (MSB) and also replaces the carry flag (C).
7 C
0
Flags:
Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1". Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during rotation; cleared otherwise. D: Unaffected. H: Unaffected.
C: Z: S: V:
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) E0 E1 Addr Mode dst R IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 31H, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 17H: RR RR 00H @01H Register 00H = 98H, C = "1" Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 8BH, C = "1"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 31H (00110001B), the statement "RR 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero is moved to bit 7, leaving the new value 98H (10011000B) in the destination register. The initial bit zero also resets the C flag to "1" and the sign flag and overflow flag are also set to "1".
6-73
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
RRC -- Rotate Right Through Carry
RRC Operation: dst dst (7) C C dst (0) dst (n) dst (n + 1), n = 0-6 The contents of the destination operand and the carry flag are rotated right one bit position. The initial value of bit zero (LSB) replaces the carry flag; the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit 7 (MSB).
7 C
0
Flags:
Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1". Set if the result is "0" cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during rotation; cleared otherwise. D: Unaffected. H: Unaffected.
C: Z: S: V:
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) C0 C1 Addr Mode dst R IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 55H, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 17H, and C = "0": RRC RRC 00H @01H Register 00H = 2AH, C = "1" Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 0BH, C = "1"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 55H (01010101B), the statement "RRC 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero ("1") replaces the carry flag and the initial value of the C flag ("1") replaces bit 7. This leaves the new value 2AH (00101010B) in destination register 00H. The sign flag and overflow flag are both cleared to "0".
6-74
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
SB0 -- Select Bank 0
SB0 Operation: BANK 0 The SB0 instruction clears the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic zero, selecting bank 0 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 4F No flags are affected.
Example:
The statement SB0 clears FLAGS.0 to "0", selecting bank 0 register addressing.
6-75
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
SB1 -- Select Bank 1
SB1 Operation: BANK 1 The SB1 instruction sets the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic one, selecting bank 1 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file. (Bank 1 is not implemented in some S3C8-series microcontrollers.) Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 5F No flags are affected.
Example:
The statement SB1 sets FLAGS.0 to "1", selecting bank 1 register addressing, if implemented.
6-76
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
SBC -- Subtract with Carry
SBC Operation: dst,src dst dst - src - c The source operand, along with the current value of the carry flag, is subtracted from the destination operand and the result is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Subtraction is performed by adding the two's-complement of the source operand to the destination operand. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the carry ("borrow") from the subtraction of the low-order operands to be subtracted from the subtraction of high-order operands. Flags: C: Z: S: V: Set if a borrow occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite sign and the sign of the result is the same as the sign of the source; cleared otherwise. D: Always set to "1". H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result; set otherwise, indicating a "borrow".
Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 32 33 34 35 36 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 10H, R2 = 03H, C = "1", register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0AH: SBC SBC SBC SBC SBC R1,R2 R1,@R2 01H,02H 01H,@02H 01H,#8AH R1 = 0CH, R2 = 03H R1 = 05H, R2 = 03H, register 03H = 0AH Register 01H = 1CH, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 15H,register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH Register 01H = 95H; C, S, and V = "1"
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 10H and register R2 the value 03H, the statement "SBC R1,R2" subtracts the source value (03H) and the C flag value ("1") from the destination (10H) and then stores the result (0CH) in register R1.
6-77
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
SCF -- Set Carry Flag
SCF Operation: C1 The carry flag (C) is set to logic one, regardless of its previous value. Flags: C: Set to "1". No other flags are affected. Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) DF
Example:
The statement SCF sets the carry flag to logic one.
6-78
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
SRA -- Shift Right Arithmetic
SRA Operation: dst dst (7) dst (7) C dst (0) dst (n) dst (n + 1), n = 0-6 An arithmetic shift-right of one bit position is performed on the destination operand. Bit zero (the LSB) replaces the carry flag. The value of bit 7 (the sign bit) is unchanged and is shifted into bit position 6.
7 C
6
0
Flags:
C: Z: S: V: D: H:
Set if the bit shifted from the LSB position (bit zero) was "1". Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Always cleared to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) D0 D1 Addr Mode dst R IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 9AH, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0BCH, and C = "1": SRA SRA 00H @02H Register 00H = 0CD, C = "0" Register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0DEH, C = "0"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 9AH (10011010B), the statement "SRA 00H" shifts the bit values in register 00H right one bit position. Bit zero ("0") clears the C flag and bit 7 ("1") is then shifted into the bit 6 position (bit 7 remains unchanged). This leaves the value 0CDH (11001101B) in destination register 00H.
6-79
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
SRP/SRP0/SRP1 -- Set Register Pointer
SRP SRP0 SRP1 Operation: src src src If src (1) = 1 and src (0) = 0 then: RP0 (3-7) If src (1) = 0 and src (0) = 1 then: RP1 (3-7) If src (1) = 0 and src (0) = 0 then: RP0 (4-7) RP0 (3) RP1 (4-7) RP1 (3) src (3-7) src (3-7) src (4-7), 0 src (4-7), 1
The source data bits one and zero (LSB) determine whether to write one or both of the register pointers, RP0 and RP1. Bits 3-7 of the selected register pointer are written unless both register pointers are selected. RP0.3 is then cleared to logic zero and RP1.3 is set to logic one. Flags: Format: Bytes opc src 2 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 31 Addr Mode src IM No flags are affected.
Examples:
The statement SRP #40H sets register pointer 0 (RP0) at location 0D6H to 40H and register pointer 1 (RP1) at location 0D7H to 48H. The statement "SRP0 #50H" sets RP0 to 50H, and the statement "SRP1 #68H" sets RP1 to 68H.
6-80
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
STOP -- Stop Operation
STOP Operation: The STOP instruction stops the both the CPU clock and system clock and causes the microcontroller to enter Stop mode. During Stop mode, the contents of on-chip CPU registers, peripheral registers, and I/O port control and data registers are retained. Stop mode can be released by an external reset operation or by external interrupts. For the reset operation, the RESET pin must be held to Low level until the required oscillation stabilization interval has elapsed. In application programs, a STOP instruction must be immediately followed by at least three NOP instructions. This ensures an adeguate time interval for the clock to stabilize before the next instruction is executed. If three or more NOP instructons are not used after STOP instruction, leakage current could be flown because of the floating state in the internal bus. Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles 4 Opcode (Hex) 7F Addr Mode dst src - - No flags are affected.
Example:
The statement STOP NOP NOP NOP ; halts all microcontroller operations
6-81
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
SUB -- Subtract
SUB Operation: dst,src dst dst - src The source operand is subtracted from the destination operand and the result is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Subtraction is performed by adding the two's complement of the source operand to the destination operand. Flags: Set if a "borrow" occurred; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise. Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite signs and the sign of the result is of the same as the sign of the source operand; cleared otherwise. D: Always set to "1". H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result; set otherwise indicating a "borrow". C: Z: S: V:
Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 22 23 24 25 26 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH: SUB SUB SUB SUB SUB SUB R1,R2 R1,@R2 01H,02H 01H,@02H 01H,#90H 01H,#65H R1 = 0FH, R2 = 03H R1 = 08H, R2 = 03H Register 01H = 1EH, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 17H, register 02H = 03H Register 01H = 91H; C, S, and V = "1" Register 01H = 0BCH; C and S = "1", V = "0"
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 12H and if register R2 contains the value 03H, the statement "SUB R1,R2" subtracts the source value (03H) from the destination value (12H) and stores the result (0FH) in destination register R1.
6-82
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
SWAP -- Swap Nibbles
SWAP Operation: dst dst (0 - 3) dst (4 - 7) The contents of the lower four bits and upper four bits of the destination operand are swapped.
7
43
0
Flags:
C: Z: S: V: D: H:
Undefined. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Undefined. Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst 2 Cycles 4 4 Opcode (Hex) F0 F1 Addr Mode dst R IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 3EH, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0A4H: SWAP SWAP 00H @02H Register 00H = 0E3H Register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 4AH
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 3EH (00111110B), the statement "SWAP 00H" swaps the lower and upper four bits (nibbles) in the 00H register, leaving the value 0E3H (11100011B).
6-83
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
TCM -- Test Complement Under Mask
TCM Operation: dst,src (NOT dst) AND src This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic one value. The bits to be tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand (mask). The TCM statement complements the destination operand, which is then ANDed with the source mask. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to determine the result. The destination and source operands are unaffected. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always cleared to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 62 63 64 65 66 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 12H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 23H: TCM TCM TCM TCM TCM R0,R1 R0,@R1 00H,01H 00H,@01H 00H,#34 R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Z = "1" R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "0" Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, Z = "1" Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "1" Register 00H = 2BH, Z = "0"
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and register R1 the value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TCM R0,R1" tests bit one in the destination register for a "1" value. Because the mask value corresponds to the test bit, the Z flag is set to logic one and can be tested to determine the result of the TCM operation.
6-84
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
TM -- Test Under Mask
TM Operation: dst,src dst AND src This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic zero value. The bits to be tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand (mask), which is ANDed with the destination operand. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to determine the result. The destination and source operands are unaffected. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always reset to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) 72 73 74 75 76 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 18H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 23H: TM TM TM TM TM R0,R1 R0,@R1 00H,01H 00H,@01H 00H,#54H R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Z = "0" R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "0" Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, Z = "0" Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "0" Register 00H = 2BH, Z = "1"
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and register R1 the value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TM R0,R1" tests bit one in the destination register for a "0" value. Because the mask value does not match the test bit, the Z flag is cleared to logic zero and can be tested to determine the result of the TM operation.
6-85
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
WFI -- Wait for Interrupt
WFI Operation: The CPU is effectively halted until an interrupt occurs, except that DMA transfers can still take place during this wait state. The WFI status can be released by an internal interrupt, including a fast interrupt . Flags: Format: Bytes opc 1 Cycles Opcode (Hex) No flags are affected.
4n 3F ( n = 1, 2, 3, ... )
Example:
The following sample program structure shows the sequence of operations that follow a "WFI" statement:
Main program
. . .
EI WFI (Next instruction)
(Enable global interrupt) (Wait for interrupt)
. . .
Interrupt occurs Interrupt service routine
. . .
Clear interrupt flag IRET
Service routine completed
6-86
S3C825A/P825A
INSTRUCTION SET
XOR -- Logical Exclusive OR
XOR Operation: dst,src dst dst XOR src The source operand is logically exclusive-ORed with the destination operand and the result is stored in the destination. The exclusive-OR operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever the corresponding bits in the operands are different; otherwise, a "0" bit is stored. Flags: C: Z: S: V: D: H: Unaffected. Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise. Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise. Always reset to "0". Unaffected. Unaffected.
Format: Bytes opc dst | src 2 Cycles 4 6 opc src dst 3 6 6 opc dst src 3 6 Opcode (Hex) B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 Addr Mode dst src r r R R R r lr R IR IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 18H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 23H: XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR R0,R1 R0,@R1 00H,01H 00H,@01H 00H,#54H R0 = 0C5H, R1 = 02H R0 = 0E4H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H Register 00H = 29H, register 01H = 02H Register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 23H Register 00H = 7FH
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H and if register R1 contains the value 02H, the statement "XOR R0,R1" logically exclusive-ORs the R1 value with the R0 value and stores the result (0C5H) in the destination register R0.
6-87
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
6-88
S3C825A/P825A
CLOCK CIRCUIT
7
OVERVIEW
CLOCK CIRCUIT
The S3C825A microcontroller has two oscillator circuits: a main clock and a sub clock circuit. The CPU and peripheral hardware operate on the system clock frequency supplied through these circuits. The maximum CPU clock frequency of S3C825A is determined by CLKCON register settings. SYSTEM CLOCK CIRCUIT The system clock circuit has the following components: -- External crystal, ceramic resonator, RC oscillation source, or an external clock source -- Oscillator stop and wake-up functions -- Programmable frequency divider for the CPU clock (fxx divided by 1, 2, 8, or 16) -- System clock control register, CLKCON -- STOP control register, STPCON CPU Clock Notation In this document, the following notation is used for descriptions of the CPU clock; fx: main clock fxt: sub clock fxx: selected system clock
7-1
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C825A/P825A
MAIN OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS
SUB OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS
XIN
XTIN
XOUT 32.768 kHz
XTOUT
Figure 7-1. Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator (fx)
Figure 7-4. Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator (fxt)
XIN
XTIN
XOUT
XTOUT
Figure 7-2. External Oscillator (fx)
Figure 7-5. External Oscillator (fxt)
XIN R XOUT
Figure 7-3. RC Oscillator (fx)
7-2
S3C825A/P825A
CLOCK CIRCUIT
CLOCK STATUS DURING POWER-DOWN MODES The two power-down modes, Stop mode and Idle mode, affect the system clock as follows: -- In Stop mode, the main oscillator is halted. Stop mode is released, and the oscillator is started, by a reset operation or an external interrupt (with RC delay noise filter). -- In Idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated to the CPU, but not to interrupt structure, timers, timer/ counters, and watch timer. Idle mode is released by a reset or by an external or internal interrupt.
Stop Release INT
Main-System Oscillator Circuit
fx
fxt
Sub-system Oscillator Circuit
Watch Timer LCD Controller
Selector 1 fXX Stop
OSCCON.3 OSCCON.0 STOP OSC inst. STPCON 1/8-1/4096 Basic Timer Timer/Counters Watch Timer Frequency Dividing Circuit LCD Controller SIO A/D Converter 1/1 1/2 1/8 1/16 UART System Clock CLKCON.4-.3 Selector 2 CPU Clock Stop OSCCON.2
IDLE Instruction
Figure 7-6. System Clock Circuit Diagram
7-3
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C825A/P825A
SYSTEM CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER (CLKCON) The system clock control register, CLKCON, is located in the set 1, address D4H. It is read/write addressable and has the following functions: -- Oscillator frequency divide-by value After the main oscillator is activated, and the fxx/16 (the slowest clock speed) is selected as the CPU clock. If necessary, you can then increase the CPU clock speed fxx/8, fxx/2, or fxx/1.
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON) D4H, Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Not used (must keep always 0) Oscillator IRQ wake-up function bit: 0 = Enable IRQ for main wake-up in power down mode 1 = Disable IRQ for main wake-up in power down mode
Not used (must keep always 0)
Divide-by selection bits for CPU clock frequency: 00 = fXX/16 01 = fXX/8 10 = fXX/2 11 = fXX/1 (non-divided)
Figure 7-7. System Clock Control Register (CLKCON)
7-4
S3C825A/P825A
CLOCK CIRCUIT
OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER (OSCCON) The oscillator control register, OSCCON, is located in set 1, bank 0, at address D2H. It is read/write addressable and has the following functions: -- System clock selection -- Main oscillator control -- Sub oscillator control OSCCON.0 register settings select Main clock or Sub clock as system clock. After a reset, Main clock is selected for system clock because the reset value of OSCCON.0 is "0". The main oscillator can be stopped or run by setting OSCCON.3. The sub oscillator can be stopped or run by setting OSCCON.2.
Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON) D2H, Bank 0, Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
System clock selection bit: 0 = Main select 1 = Sub select Not used for S3C825A Not used for S3C825A Sub system oscillator control bit: 0 = Sub oscillator RUN 1 = Sub oscillator STOP Main system oscillator control bit: 0 = Main oscillator RUN 1 = Main oscillator STOP
Figure 7-8. Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON)
7-5
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C825A/P825A
SWITCHING THE CPU CLOCK Data loading in the oscillator control register, OSCCON, determine whether a main or a sub clock is selected as the CPU clock, and also how this frequency is to be divided by setting CLKCON. This makes it possible to switch dynamically between main and sub clocks and to modify operating frequencies. OSCCON.0 select the main clock (fx) or the sub clock (fxt) for the CPU clock. OSCCON .3 start or stop main clock oscillation, and OSCCON.2 start or stop sub clock oscillation. CLKCON.4-.3 control the frequency divider circuit, and divide the selected fxx clock by 1, 2, 8, 16. For example, you are using the default CPU clock (normal operating mode and a main clock of fx/16) and you want to switch from the fx clock to a sub clock and to stop the main clock. To do this, you need to set CLKCON.4-.3 to "11", OSCCON.0 to "1", and OSCCON.3 to "1" simultaneously. This switches the clock from fx to fxt and stops main clock oscillation. The following steps must be taken to switch from a sub clock to the main clock: first, set OSCCON.3 to "0" to enable main clock oscillation. Then, after a certain number of machine cycles has elapsed, select the main clock by setting OSCCON.0 to "0".
+ PROGRAMMING TIP -- Switching the CPU clock
1. This example shows how to change from the main clock to the sub clock: MA2SUB LD RET 2. This example shows how to change from sub clock to main clock: SUB2MA AND CALL AND RET SRP LD NOP DJNZ RET OSCCON,#07H DLY16 OSCCON,#06H #0C0H R0,#20H R0,DEL ; Start the main clock oscillation ; Delay 16 ms ; Switch to the main clock OSCCON,#01H ; Switches to the sub clock ; Stop the main clock oscillation
DLY16 DEL
7-6
S3C825A/P825A
CLOCK CIRCUIT
STOP Control Register (STPCON) D1H, Bank 0, Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
STOP Control bits: Other values = Disable STOP instruction 10100101 = Enable STOP instruction
NOTE: Before execute the STOP instruction, set this STPCON register as "10100101B". Otherwise the STOP instruction will not execute as well as reset will be generated.
Figure 7-9. STOP Control Register (STPCON)
7-7
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
7-8
S3C825A/P825A
RESET and POWER-DOWN
8
OVERVIEW
RESET and POWER-DOWN
SYSTEM RESET
During a power-on reset, the voltage at VDD goes to High level and the RESET pin is forced to Low level. The RESET signal is input through a schmitt trigger circuit where it is then synchronized with the CPU clock. This procedure brings the S3C825A into a known operating status. To allow time for internal CPU clock oscillation to stabilize, the RESET pin must be held to Low level for a minimum time interval after the power supply comes within tolerance. The minimum required time of a reset operation for oscillation stabilization is 1 millisecond. Whenever a reset occurs during normal operation (that is, when both VDD and RESET are High level), the RESET pin is forced Low level and the reset operation starts. All system and peripheral control registers are then reset to their default hardware values In summary, the following sequence of events occurs during a reset operation: -- All interrupt is disabled. -- The watchdog function (basic timer) is enabled. -- Ports 0-8 are set to input mode, and all pull-up resistors are disabled for the I/O port. -- Peripheral control and data register settings are disabled and reset to their default hardware values. -- The program counter (PC) is loaded with the program reset address in the ROM, 0100H. -- When the programmed oscillation stabilization time interval has elapsed, the instruction stored in ROM location 0100H (and 0101H) is fetched and executed.
NORMAL MODE RESET OPERATION In normal (masked ROM) mode, the Test pin is tied to VSS. A reset enables access to the 48-Kbyte on-chip ROM. NOTE To program the duration of the oscillation stabilization interval, you make the appropriate settings to the basic timer control register, BTCON, before entering Stop mode. Also, if you do not want to use the basic timer watchdog function (which causes a system reset if a basic timer counter overflow occurs), you can disable it by writing "1010B" to the upper nibble of BTCON.
8-1
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C825A/P825A
HARDWARE RESET VALUES Table 8-1, 8-2, 8-3 list the reset values for CPU and system registers, peripheral control registers, and peripheral data registers following a reset operation. The following notation is used to represent reset values: -- A "1" or a "0" shows the reset bit value as logic one or logic zero, respectively. -- An "x" means that the bit value is undefined after a reset. -- A dash ("-") means that the bit is either not used or not mapped, but read 0 is the bit value.
Table 8-1. S3C825A Set 1 Register and Values after RESET Register Name Mnemonic Address Dec Interrupt Pending Register (NOTE) STOP Control Register
(NOTE)
Bit Values after RESET 7 - 0 - 0 0 x 1 1 x x x x 0 x 0 0 6 - 0 - 0 0 x 1 1 x x x x 0 x - 0 5 0 0 - 0 0 x 0 0 x x x x 0 x - 0 4 0 0 - 0 0 x 0 0 x x x x 0 x x 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 1 x x x x 0 x x 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 x - - x x x x 0 x x 0 1 0 0 - 0 0 0 - - x x x x 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - x x x x 0 x 0 0
Hex D0H D1H D2H D3H D4H D5H D6H D7H D8H D9H DAH DBH DCH DDH DEH DFH
INTPND STPCON OSCCON BTCON CLKCON FLAGS RP0 RP1 SPH SPL IPH IPL IRQ IMR SYM PP
208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
Oscillator Control Register (NOTE) Basic Timer Control Register Clock Control Register System Flags Register Register Pointer (High Byte) Register Pointer (Low Byte) Stack Pointer (High Byte) Stack Pointer (Low Byte) Instruction Pointer (High Byte) Instruction Pointer (Low Byte) Interrupt Request Register Interrupt Mask Register System Mode Register Register Page Pointer
NOTE: The registers, INTPND/STPCON/OSCCON, are in bank 0 of set 1.
8-2
S3C825A/P825A
RESET and POWER-DOWN
Table 8-2. S3C825A Set 1, Bank 0 Register Values after RESET Register Name Mnemonic Address Dec SIO Control Register SIO Data Register SIO Prescaler Register Timer 0 Counter Register Timer 0 Data Register Timer 0 Control Register Timer B Counter Register Timer A Counter Register Timer B Data Register Timer A Data Register Timer B Control Register Timer 1/A Control Register Timer 2 Counter Register Timer 2 Data Register Timer 2 Control Register A/D Converter Control Register
A/D Converter Data Register (high byte) A/D Converter Data Register (low byte)
Bit Values after RESET 7 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 - 0 0 1 0 - x - 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 - 0 0 1 0 - x - 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x - - - 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 4 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x - - - 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 3 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x - 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x - 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x x 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x x 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 x 0 1 0 x
Hex E0H E1H E2H E3H E4H E5H E6H E7H E8H E9H EAH EBH ECH EDH EEH EFH F0H F1H F2H F3H F4H F5H F6H F7H F8H F9H FAH FBH FDH FFH
SIOCON SIODATA SIOPS T0CNT T0DATA T0CON TBCNT TACNT TBDATA TADATA TBCON TACON T2CNT T2DATA T2CON ADCON ADDATAH ADDATAL LCON LMOD T3CNTH T3CNTL T3DATAH T3DATAL T3CON UDATA UARTCON BRDATA BTCNT IPR
224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 253 255
LCD Control Register LCD Mode Register Timer 3 Counter (high byte) Timer 3 Counter (low byte) Timer 3 Data Register (high byte) Timer 3 Data Register (low byte) Timer 3 Control Register UART data register UART control register UART Baud Rate data register Basic Timer Counter Interrupt Priority Register
Location FCH is not mapped. Location FEH is not mapped.
8-3
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C825A/P825A
Table 8-3. S3C825A Set 1, Bank 1 Register Values after RESET Register Name Mnemonic Address Dec Port 2 Control Register(High Byte) Port 2 Control Register(Low Byte) Port 2 Pull-up Resistors enable Register Port 2 Interrupt Control Register Port 3 Control Register(High Byte) Port 3 Control Register(Low Byte)
Port 3 Pull-up Resistors enable Register Port 4 Interrupt Edge Selection Register
Bit Values after RESET 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Hex E0H E1H E2H E3H E4H E5H E6H E7H E8H E9H EAH EBH ECH EDH EEH EFH F0H F1H F2H F3H F4H F5H F6H F7H F8H F9H FAH
P2CONH P2CONL P2PUR P2INT P3CONH P3CONL P3PUR P4EDGE P4CONH P4CONL P4INT P4PND P5CONH P5CONL P5PUR WTCON P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 PG0CON PG1CON
224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 251 252
Port 4 Control Register(High Byte) Port 4 Control Register(Low Byte) Port 4 Interrupt Control Register Port 4 Interrupt Pending Register Port 5 Control Register(High Byte) Port 5 Control Register(Low Byte)
Port 5 Pull-up Resistors enable Register
Watch timer control register Port 0 Data Register Port 1 Data Register Port 2 Data Register Port 3 Data Register Port 4 Data Register Port 5 Data Register Port 6 Data Register Port 7 Data Register Port 8 Data Register Port Group 0 Control Register Port Group 1 Control Register
Locations FBH-FFH are not mapped.
8-4
S3C825A/P825A
RESET and POWER-DOWN
POWER-DOWN MODES
STOP MODE Stop mode is invoked by the instruction STOP (opcode 7FH). In Stop mode, the operation of the CPU and all peripherals is halted. That is, the on-chip oscillator for system clock stops and the supply current is reduced to less than 3 A. All system functions stop when the clock "freezes", but data stored in the internal register file is retained. Stop mode can be released in one of two ways: by a reset or by external interrupts, for more details see Figure 7-3. NOTE Do not use stop mode if you are using an external clock source because XIN or XTIN input must be restricted internally to VSS to reduce current leakage. Using RESET to Release Stop Mode Stop mode is released when the RESET signal is released and returns to high level: all system and peripheral control registers are reset to their default hardware values and the contents of all data registers are retained. A reset operation automatically selects a slow clock fxx/16 because CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4 are cleared to '00B'. After the programmed oscillation stabilization interval has elapsed, the CPU starts the system initialization routine by fetching the program instruction stored in ROM location 0100H. Using an External Interrupt to Release Stop Mode External interrupts with an RC-delay noise filter circuit can be used to release Stop mode. Which interrupt you can use to release Stop mode in a given situation depends on the microcontroller's current internal operating mode. The external interrupts in the S3C825A interrupt structure that can be used to release Stop mode are: -- External interrupts P2.4-P2.7 (INT0-INT3) and P4.0-P4.7 (INT4-INT11) Please note the following conditions for Stop mode release: -- If you release Stop mode using an external interrupt, the current values in system and peripheral control registers are unchanged except STPCON register. -- If you use an internal or external interrupt for stop mode release, you can also program the duration of the oscillation stabilization interval. To do this, you must make the appropriate control and clock settings before entering stop mode. -- When the Stop mode is released by external interrupt, the CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 bit-pair setting remains unchanged and the currently selected clock value is used. -- The external interrupt is serviced when the Stop mode release occurs. Following the IRET from the service routine, the instruction immediately following the one that initiated Stop mode is executed. How to Enter into Stop Mode Handling STPCON register then writing Stop instruction (keep the order). LD STOP NOP NOP NOP STPCON, #10100101B
8-5
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C825A/P825A
IDLE MODE Idle mode is invoked by the instruction IDLE (opcode 6FH). In idle mode, CPU operations are halted while some peripherals remain active. During idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated away from the CPU, but all peripherals remain active. Port pins retain the mode (input or output) they had at the time idle mode was entered. There are two ways to release idle mode: 1. Execute a reset. All system and peripheral control registers are reset to their default values and the contents of all data registers are retained. The reset automatically selects the slow clock fxx/16 because CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 are cleared to `00B'. If interrupts are masked, a reset is the only way to release idle mode. 2. Activate any enabled interrupt, causing idle mode to be released. When you use an interrupt to release idle mode, the CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 register values remain unchanged, and the currently selected clock value is used. The interrupt is then serviced. When the return-from-interrupt (IRET) occurs, the instruction immediately following the one that initiated idle mode is executed.
8-6
S3C825A/P825A
I/O PORTS
9
OVERVIEW
I/O PORTS
The S3C825A microcontroller has four bit-programmable and five nibble-programmable I/O ports, P0-P8. The port 0-4, 6, and 7 are 8-bit ports, the port 5 is 7-bit port, and the port 8 is 4-bit port. This gives a total of 67 I/O pins. Each port can be flexibly configured to meet application design requirements. The CPU accesses ports by directly writing or reading port registers. No special I/O instructions are required. All ports of the S3C825A can be configured to input or output mode and P0, P6-P8 are shared with LCD signals. Table 9-1 gives you a general overview of the S3C825A I/O port functions.
9-1
I/O PORTS
S3C825A/P825A
Table 9-1. S3C825A Port Configuration Overview Port 0 Configuration Options 4-bit programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-ups. P0.0-P0.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD segment signals. 4-bit programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-ups. P1.0-P1.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD segment signals. 1-bit programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-ups. P2.4-P2.7 can be used as input for external interrupts INT0-INT3 (with noise filter and interrupt control, and can alternately be used as T0CLK, T1CLK, TAOUT, and TBOUT. 1-bit programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-ups. Alternately P3.0-P3.7 can be used as AD0-AD3, T3CLK, T3OUT/T3PWM/T3CAP, T0OUT/T0PWM/T0CAP. 1-bit programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-ups. P4.0-P4.7 can alternately be used as inputs for external interrupts INT4-INT11 (with noise filter and interrupt control). 1-bit programmable I/O port. Schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-ups. Alternately P5.0-P5.5 can be used as SCK, SI, SO, BUZ, RXD, and TXD. 4-bit programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-ups. P6.0-P6.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD signals. 4-bit programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-ups. P7.0-P7.7 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD segment signals. 4-bit programmable I/O port. Input or push-pull, open-drain output mode selected by software; software assignable pull-ups. P8.0-P8.3 can alternately be used as outputs for LCD segment signals.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9-2
S3C825A/P825A
I/O PORTS
PORT DATA REGISTERS Table 9-2 gives you an overview of the register locations of all nine S3C825A I/O port data registers. Data registers for ports 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 have the general format shown in Figure 9-1. Table 9-2. Port Data Register Summary Register Name Port 0 data register Port 1 data register Port 2 data register Port 3 data register Port 4 data register Port 5 data register Port 6 data register Port 7 data register Port 8 data register Mnemonic P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 Decimal 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 Hex F0H F1H F2H F3H F4H F5H F6H F7H F8H Location Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 Set 1, Bank 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
9-3
I/O PORTS
S3C825A/P825A
PORT 0, 1 Port 0 and 1 are 8-bit I/O ports with nibble configurable pins, respectively. Port 0 and 1 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the Port 0 and 1 data registers, P0 at location F0H and P1 at location F1H in set 1, bank 1. P0.0-P0.7 and P1.0-P1.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pull-ups), as output (open drain or push-pull). And they can serve as segment pins for LCD, also. Port Group 0 Control Register (PG0CON) Port 0 and 1 have a 8-bit control register: PG0CON.0-.3 for P0.0-P0.7 and PG0CON.4-.7 for P1.0-P1.7. A reset clears the PG0CON register to "00H", configuring all pins to input mode.
Port Group 0 Control Register F9H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P1.4-P1.7 /SEG28-SEG31
P0.0-P0.3 /SEG16-SEG19 P0.4-P0.7 /SEG20-SEG23
P1.0-P1.3 /SEG24-SEG27 PG0CON bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Output mode, open-drain Output mode, push-pull The shared I/O ports with LCD segments should be selected as one of two by LMOD.3-.0.
NOTE:
Figure 9-1. Port Group 0 Control Register (PG0CON)
9-4
S3C825A/P825A
I/O PORTS
PORT 2 Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 2 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 2 data register, P2 at location F2H in set 1, bank 1. P2.0-P2.7 can serve as inputs, as outputs (push-pull or open-drain) or it can be configured the following functions. -- Low-nibble pins (P2.0-P2.3): T2CLK, T2OUT -- High-nibble pins (P2.4-P2.7): T0CLK, T1CLK, TAOUT, TBOUT, INT0-INT3 Port 2 Control Registers (P2CONH, P2CONL) Port 2 has two 8-bit control registers: P2CONH for P2.4-P2.7 and P2CONL for P2.0-P2.3. A reset clears the P2CONH and P2CONL registers to "00H", configuring P2.4-P2.7 pins to input mode with interrupt on falling edge and P2.0-P2.3 pins to input mode. You use control registers setting to select input or output mode(push-pull or open-drain) and enable the alternative functions. When programming the port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the port 2 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module. Port 2 Pull-Up Resistor Control Register (P2PUR) Using the port2 pull-up resistor control register, P2PUR (E2H, set 1, bank 1), you can configure pull-up resistors to individual port 2 pins. Port 2 Interrupt Control Registers (P2INT) To process external interrupts at the port 2 pins, a additional control register is provided: the port 2 interrupt control register P2INT (E3H, set 1, bank 1). The port 2 interrupt control register P2INT lets you check for interrupt pending conditions and clear the pending condition when the interrupt service routine has been initiated. The application program detects interrupt requests by polling the P2INT register at regular intervals. When the interrupt enable bit of any port 2 pin is "1", a falling edge at that pin will generate an interrupt request. The corresponding pending bit is then automatically set to "1" and the IRQ level goes low to signal the CPU that an interrupt request is waiting. When the CPU acknowledges the interrupt request, application software must the clear the pending condition by writing a "0" to the corresponding P2INT bit.
9-5
I/O PORTS
S3C825A/P825A
Port 2 Control Register, High Byte (P2CONH) E0H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P2.7/TBOUT (INT3)
P2.6/TAOUT (INT2)
P2.5/T1CLK (INT1)
P2.4/T0CLK (INT0)
P2CONH bit-pair pin configuration 00 01 10 11 Schmitt trigger input mode, interrupt on falling edge (T0CLK, T1CLK) Output mpde, open-drain Alternative function (TAOUT, TBOUT) Output mode, push-pull
Figure 9-2. Port 2 High-Byte Control Register (P2CONH)
Port 2 Control Register, Low Byte (P2CONL) E1H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P2.3/ T2OUT
P2.2/ T2CLK
P2.1
P2.0
P2CONL bit-pair pin configuration 00 01 10 11 Schmitt trigger input mode, interrupt on falling edge (T2CLK) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (T2OUT) Output mode, push-pull
Figure 9-3. Port 2 Low-Byte Control Register (P2CONL)
9-6
S3C825A/P825A
I/O PORTS
Port 2 Pull-up Control Register (P2PUR) E2H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P2.7
P2.6
P2.5
P2.4
P2.3
P2.2
P2.1
P2.0
P2PUR bit configuration settings: 0 1 NOTE: Disable pull-up resistor Enable pull-up resistor The corresponding pull-up resistor is disabled automatically when a bit of port 2 is selected as output mode.
Figure 9-4. Port 2 Pull-up Control Register (P2PUR)
Port 2 Interrupt Control Register (P2INT) E3H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
PND3 INT3 PND2 INT2 PND1 INT1 PND0 INT0 INTn bit configuration settings: 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
PNDn bit configuration settings: 0 1 NOTE: Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending "n" is 0, 1, 2, and 3.
Figure 9-5. Port 2 Interrupt Control Register (P2INT)
9-7
I/O PORTS
S3C825A/P825A
PORT 3 Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 3 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the Port 3 data register, P3 at location F3H in set 1, bank 1. P3.0-P3.7 can serve as inputs, as outputs (push pull or open-drain) or you can configure the following alternative functions: -- Low-nibble pins (P3.0-P3.3): AD0-AD3 -- High-nibble pins (P3.4-P3.7): T3CLK, T3OUT/T3PWM/T3CAP, T0OUT/T0PWM/T0CAP Port 3 Control Registers (P3CONH, P3CONL) Port 3 has two 8-bit control registers: P3CONH for P3.4-P3.7 and P3CONL for P3.0-P3.3. A reset clears the P3CONH and P3CONL registers to "00H", configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers settings to select input or output mode (push-pull or open drain) and enable the alternative functions. When programming the port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the port 3 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module. Port 3 Pull-up Resistor Control Register (P3PUR) Using the port 3 pull-up resistor control register, P3PUR (E6H, set 1, bank 1), you can configure pull-up resistors to individual port 3 pins.
Port 3 Control Register, High Byte E4H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P3.4 P3.5/T3CLK P3.6/T3OUT/T3PWM/T3CAP P3.7/T0OUT/T0PWM/T0CAP P3CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 Input mode (T3CLK, T3CAP, T0CAP) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (T3OUT/T3PWM, T0OUT/T0CAP) Output mode, push-pull
Figure 9-6. Port 3 High-Byte Control Register (P3CONH)
9-8
S3C825A/P825A
I/O PORTS
Port 3 Control Register, Low Byte E5H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P3.0/AD0 P3.1/AD1 P3.2/AD2 P3.3/AD3 P3CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 Input mode Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (AD0-AD3) Output mode, push-pull
Figure 9-7. Port 3 Low-Byte Control Register (P3CONL)
Port 3 Pull-up Control Register E6H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P3.7
P3.6
P3.5
P3.4
P3.3
P3.2
P3.1
P3.0
P3PUR bit configuration settings: 0 1 NOTE: Disable pull-up resistor Enable pull-up resistor The corresponding pull-up resistor is disabled automatically, when a bit of port 3 is selected as output mode.
Figure 9-8. Port 3 Pull-up Control Register (P3PUR)
9-9
I/O PORTS
S3C825A/P825A
PORT 4 Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 4 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 4 data register, P4 at location F4H in set 1, bank 1. P4.0-P4.7 can serve as inputs (with or without pull-up), as outputs (push-pull or open-drain) or you can be configured the following functions. -- Low-nibble pins (P4.0-P4.3): INT4-INT7 -- High-nibble pins (P4.4-P4.7): INT8-INT11 Port 4 Control Registers (P4CONH, P4CONL) Port 4 has two 8-bit control registers: P4CONH for P4.4-P4.7 and P4CONL for P4.0-P4.3. A reset clears the P4CONH and P4CONL registers to "00H", configuring pins to input mode. You use control registers setting to select input or output mode(push-pull or open-drain). Port 4 Interrupt Enable, Pending, and Edge Selection Registers (P4INT, P4PND, P4EDGE) To process external interrupts at the port 4 pins, three additional control registers are provided: the port 4 interrupt enable register P4INT (EAH, set 1, bank 1), the port 4 interrupt pending register P4PND (EBH, set1, bank 1), and the port 4 interrupt edge selection register P4EDGE (E7H, set 1, bank 1). The port 4 interrupt pending register P4PND lets you check for interrupt pending conditions and clear the pending condition when the interrupt service routine has been initiated. The application program detects interrupt requests by polling the P4PND register at regular intervals. When the interrupt enable bit of any port 4 pin is "1", a rising or falling edge at that pin will generate an interrupt request. The corresponding P4PND bit is then automatically set to "1" and the IRQ level goes low to signal the CPU that an interrupt request is waiting. When the CPU acknowledges the interrupt request, application software must the clear the pending condition by writing a "0" to the corresponding P4PND bit.
Port 4 Control Register, High Byte (P4CONH) E8H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P4.7 (INT11)
P4.6 (INT10)
P4.5 (INT9)
P4.4 (INT8)
P4CONH bit-pair pin configuration 00 01 10 11 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up resistor Output mode, open-drain Output mode, push-pull
Figure 9-9. Port 4 High-Byte Control Register (P4CONH)
9-10
S3C825A/P825A
I/O PORTS
Port 4 Control Register, Low Byte (P4CONL) E9H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P4.3 (INT7)
P4.2 (INT6)
P4.1 (INT5)
P4.0 (INT4)
P4CONL bit-pair pin configuration 00 01 10 11 Schmitt trigger input mode Schmitt trigger input mode, pull-up resistor Output mode, open-drain Output mode, push-pull
Figure 9-10. Port 4 Low-Byte Control Register (P4CONL)
Port 4 Interrupt Control Register (P4INT) EAH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
INT11 INT10 INT9 INT8 INT7 INT6 INT5 INT4
P4INT bit configuration settings: 0 1 Disable interrupt Enable interrupt
Figure 9-11. Port 4 Interrupt Control Register (P4INT)
9-11
I/O PORTS
S3C825A/P825A
Port 4 Interrupt Pending Register (P4PND) EBH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
PND11 PND10 PND9 PND8 PND7 PND6 PND5 PND4
P4PND bit configuration settings: 0 1 Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0 Interrupt request is pending
Figure 9-12. Port 4 Interrupt Pending Control Register (P4PND)
Port 4 Interrupt Edge Selection Register (P4EDGE) E7H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
EDGE11 EDGE10 EDGE9 EDGE8 EDGE7 EDGE6 EDGE5 EDGE4
P4EDGE bit configuration settings: 0 1 Falling edge detection Rising edge detection
Figure 9-13. Port 4 Interrupt Edge Selection Register (P4EDGE)
9-12
S3C825A/P825A
I/O PORTS
PORT 5 Port 5 is an 7-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 5 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 5 data register, P5 at location F5H in set 1, bank 1. P5.0-P5.6 can serve as inputs or as pushpull, open-drain outputs. You can configure the following alternative functions: -- Low-nibble pins (P5.0-P5.3): SCK, SI, SO, BUZ -- High-nibble pins (P5.4-P5.6): RXD, TXD Port 5 Control Registers (P5CONH, P5CONL) Port 5 has two 8-bit control registers: P5CONH for P5.4-P5.6 and P5CONL for P5.0-P5.3, and P5CONH.7-.6 for TXD/RXD output control. A reset clears the P5CONH and P5CONL registers to "00H", configuring all pins to input mode and TXD/RXD to output disable. You use control registers settings to select input or output mode, and enable the alternative functions. When programming this port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the port 5 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 5 Control Register, High Byte (P5CONH) ECH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
TXD output control bit 0 Disble TXD output at P5.5 1 Enable TXD output at P5.5
P5.6
P5.5/TXD
P5.4/RXD
RXD output control bit 0 Disble RXD output at P5.4 1 Enable RXD output at P5.4
P5CONH bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 Input mode (RXD) Output mode, open-drain (RXD/TXD) Not available Output mode, push-pull (RXD/TXD)
NOTE: The RXD and TXD outputs depend on P5CONH.6 and P5CONH.7, respectively.
Figure 9-14. Port 5 High-Byte Control Register (P5CONH)
9-13
I/O PORTS
S3C825A/P825A
Port 5 Control Register, Low Byte (P5CONL) EDH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P5.0/SCK P5.2/SO P5.3/BUZ P5CONL bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 Input mode (SCK, SI) Output mode, open-drain Alternative function (BUZ, SCK, SO) Output mode, push-pull P5.1/SI
Figure 9-15. Port 5 Low-Byte Control Register (P5CONL)
Port 5 Pull-up Control Register (P5PUR) EEH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Not P5.6 used
P5.5
P5.4
P5.3
P5.2
P5.1
P5.0
P5PUR bit configuration settings: 0 1 Disable pull-up resistor Enable pull-up resistor
NOTE:
The corresponding pull-up resistor is disabled automatically, when a bit of port 5 is selected as output mode.
Figure 9-16. Port 5 Pull-up Control Register (P5PUR)
9-14
S3C825A/P825A
I/O PORTS
PORT 6, 7, 8 Port 6 and 7 are 8-bit I/O port and port 8 is 4-bit I/O port with nibble configurable pins, respectively. Port 6, 7, and 8 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading the port 6, 7, and 8 data registers, P6 at location F6H, P7 at location F7H, and P8 at location F8H in set 1, bank 1. P6.0-P6.7, P7.0-P7.7, and P8.0-P8.3 can serve as inputs (with or without pull-ups), as output (open drain or push-pull). And they can serve as segment or common pins for LCD also. Port Group 1 Control Register (PG1CON) Port 6, 7, and 8 have an 8-bit control register: PG1CON.0-.1 for P6.0-P6.7, PG1CON.2-.5 for P7.0-P7.7, and PG1CON.6-.7 for P8.0-P8.3. A reset clears the PG1CON register to "00H", configuring all pins to input mode.
Port Group 1 Control Register FAH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
P8.0-P8.3 /SEG12-SEG15
P7.0-P7.3 P7.4-P7.7 /SEG4-SEG7 /SEG8-SEG11
P6.0-P6.7 /COM0-COM3 /SEG0-SEG3
PG1CON bit-pair pin configuration settings 00 01 10 11 Input mode Input mode, pull-up Output mode, open-drain Output mode, push-pull Refer to LCD mode control register (LMOD).
NOTE:
Figure 9-17. Port Group 1 Control Register (PG1CON)
9-15
I/O PORTS
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
9-16
S3C825A/P825A
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
10
OVERVIEW
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
The S3C825A has two default timers: an 8-bit basic timer and one 8-bit general-purpose timer/counter. The 8-bit timer/counter is called timer 0.
BASIC TIMER (BT)
You can use the basic timer (BT) in two different ways: -- As a watchdog timer to provide an automatic reset mechanism in the event of a system malfunction. -- To signal the end of the required oscillation stabilization interval after a reset or a stop mode release. The functional components of the basic timer block are: -- Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 4096, 1024, 128, or 16) with multiplexer -- 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (set 1, bank 0, FDH, read-only) -- Basic timer control register, BTCON (set 1, D3H, read/write)
10-1
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
S3C825A/P825A
BASIC TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (BTCON) The basic timer control register, BTCON, is used to select the input clock frequency, to clear the basic timer counter and frequency dividers, and to enable or disable the watchdog timer function. It is located in set 1, address D3H, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode. A reset clears BTCON to "00H". This enables the watchdog function and selects a basic timer clock frequency of fxx/4096. To disable the watchdog function, you must write the signature code "1010B" to the basic timer register control bits BTCON.7-BTCON.4. The 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (set 1, bank 0, FDH), can be cleared at any time during normal operation by writing a "1" to BTCON.1. To clear the frequency dividers for all timers input clock, you write a "1" to BTCON.0.
Basic TImer Control Register (BTCON) D3H, Set 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Watchdog timer enable bits: 1010B = Disable watchdog function Other value = Enable watchdog function
Divider clear bit for all timers: 0 = No effect 1= Clear divider Basic timer counter clear bit: 0 = No effect 1= Clear BTCNT
Basic timer input clock selection bits: 00 = fXX/4096 01 = fXX/1024 10 = fXX/128 11 = fXX/16
Figure 10-1. Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)
10-2
S3C825A/P825A
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
BASIC TIMER FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Watchdog Timer Function You can program the basic timer overflow signal (BTOVF) to generate a reset by setting BTCON.7-BTCON.4 to any value other than "1010B". (The "1010B" value disables the watchdog function.) A reset clears BTCON to "00H", automatically enabling the watchdog timer function. A reset also selects the CPU clock (as determined by the current CLKCON register setting), divided by 4096, as the BT clock. A reset whenever a basic timer counter overflow occurs. During normal operation, the application program must prevent the overflow, and the accompanying reset operation, from occurring. To do this, the BTCNT value must be cleared (by writing a "1" to BTCON.1) at regular intervals. If a system malfunction occurs due to circuit noise or some other error condition, the BT counter clear operation will not be executed and a basic timer overflow will occur, initiating a reset. In other words, during normal operation, the basic timer overflow loop (a bit 7 overflow of the 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT) is always broken by a BTCNT clear instruction. If a malfunction does occur, a reset is triggered automatically. Oscillation Stabilization Interval Timer Function You can also use the basic timer to program a specific oscillation stabilization interval following a reset or when stop mode has been released by an external interrupt. In stop mode, whenever a reset or an internal and an external interrupt occurs, the oscillator starts. The BTCNT value then starts increasing at the rate of fxx/4096 (for reset), or at the rate of the preset clock source (for an internal and an external interrupt). When BTCNT.3 overflows, a signal is generated to indicate that the stabilization interval has elapsed and to gate the clock signal off to the CPU so that it can resume normal operation. In summary, the following events occur when stop mode is released: 1. During stop mode, a power-on reset or an internal and an external interrupt occurs to trigger the stop mode release and oscillation starts. 2. If a power-on reset occurred, the basic timer counter will increase at the rate of fxx/4096. If an internal and an external interrupt is used to release stop mode, the BTCNT value increases at the rate of the preset clock source. 3. Clock oscillation stabilization interval begins and continues until bit 3 of the basic timer counter overflows. 4. When a BTCNT.3 overflow occurs, normal CPU operation resumes.
10-3
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
S3C825A/P825A
RESET or STOP Bit 1 Bits 3, 2 Data Bus fXX/4096 fXX/1024 fXX DIV fXX/128 fXX/16 R Start the CPU (note) MUX 8-Bit Up Counter (BTCNT, Read-Only) OVF RESET Clear Basic Timer Control Register (Write '1010xxxxB' to Disable)
Bit 0
NOTE:
During a power-on reset operation, the CPU is idle during the required oscillation stabilization interval (until bit 4 of the basic timer counter overflows).
Figure 10-2. Basic Timer Block Diagram
10-4
S3C825A/P825A
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
8-BIT TIMER/COUNTER 0
Timer/counter 0 has three operating modes, one of which you select using the appropriate T0CON setting: -- Interval timer mode -- Capture input mode with a rising or falling edge trigger at the P3.7 pin -- PWM mode Timer/counter 0 has the following functional components: -- Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 1024, 256, 64, 8, or 1) with multiplexer -- External clock input (P2.4, T0CLK) -- 8-bit counter (T0CNT), 8-bit comparator, and 8-bit reference data register (T0DATA) -- I/O pins for capture input, match output, or PWM output (P3.7/T0CAP, P3.7/T0OUT, P3.7/T0PWM) -- Timer 0 overflow interrupt (IRQ0, vector E2H) and match/capture interrupt (IRQ0, vector E0H) generation -- Timer 0 control register, T0CON (set 1, E5H, bank 0, read/write)
TIMER/COUNTER 0 CONTROL REGISTER (T0CON) You use the timer 0 control register, T0CON, to -- Select the timer 0 operating mode (interval timer, capture mode, or PWM mode) -- Select the timer 0 input clock frequency -- Clear the timer 0 counter, T0CNT -- Enable the timer 0 overflow interrupt or timer 0 match/capture interrupt -- Clear timer 0 match/capture interrupt pending condition
10-5
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
S3C825A/P825A
T0CON is located in set 1, bank 0, at address E5H, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode. A reset clears T0CON to "00H". This sets timer 0 to normal interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency of fxx/1024, and disables all timer 0 interrupts. You can clear the timer 0 counter at any time during normal operation by writing a "1" to T0CON.2. The timer 0 overflow interrupt (T0OVF) is interrupt level IRQ0 and has the vector address E2H. When a timer 0 overflow interrupt occurs and is serviced by the CPU, the pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware or must be cleared by software. To enable the timer 0 match/capture interrupt (IRQ0, vector E0H), you must write T0CON.1 to "1". To detect a match/capture interrupt pending condition, the application program polls INTPND.1. When a "1" is detected, a timer 0 match or capture interrupt is pending. When the interrupt request has been serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the timer 0 match/capture interrupt pending bit, INTPND.1.
Timer 0 Control Register (T0CON) E5H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Timer 0 input clock selection bits: 000 = fxx/1024 001 = fxx/256 010 = fxx/64 011 = fxx/8 100 = fxx 101 = External clock (P2.4/T0CLK) falling edge 110 = External clock (P2.4/T0CLK) rising edge 111 = Counter stop
Timer 0 overflow interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable overflow interrupt 1 = Enable overflow interrupt Timer 0 match/capture interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable interrupt 1 = Enable interrupt Timer 0 counter clear bit: 0 = No effect 1 = Clear the timer 0 counter (when write)
Timer 0 operating mode selection bits: 00 = Interval mode (P3.7/T0OUT) 01 = Capture mode (capture on rising edge, counter running, OVF can occur) 10 = Capture mode (capture on falling edge, counter running, OVF can occur) 11 = PWM mode (OVF and match interrupt can occur)
Figure 10-3. Timer 0 Control Register (T0CON)
10-6
S3C825A/P825A
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
Interrupt Pending Register (INTPND) D0H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Not used
Timer 0 overflow interrupt pending bit Timer 0 match/capture interrupt pending bit Timer 3 overflow interrupt pending bit Timer 3 match/capture interrupt pending bit Tx interrupt pending bit (for UART) Rx interrupt pending bit (for UART): 0 = Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write "0". 1 = Interrupt request is pending
Figure 10-4. Interrupt Pending Register (INTPND)
10-7
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
S3C825A/P825A
TIMER 0 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Timer 0 Interrupts (IRQ0, Vectors E0H and E2H) The timer 0 can generate two interrupts: the timer 0 overflow interrupt (T0OVF), and the timer 0 match/ capture interrupt (T0INT). T0OVF is belongs to interrupt level IRQ0, vector E2H. T0INT also belongs to interrupt level IRQ0, but is assigned the separate vector address, E0H. A timer 0 overflow interrupt pending condition is automatically cleared by hardware when it has been serviced or should be cleared by software in the interrupt service routine by writing a "0" to the INTPND.0 interrupt pending bit. However, the timer 0 match/capture interrupt pending condition must be cleared by the application's interrupt service routine by writing a "0" to the INTPND.1 interrupt pending bit. Interval Timer Mode In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the value written to the timer 0 reference data register, T0DATA. The match signal generates a timer 0 match interrupt (T0INT, vector E0H) and clears the counter. If, for example, you write the value "10H" to T0DATA, the counter will increment until it reaches "10H". At this point, the timer 0 interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes. With each match, the level of the signal at the timer 0 output pin is inverted (see Figure 10-5).
Capture Signal CLK 8-Bit Up Counter R (Clear)
Interrupt Enable/Disable T0CON.1
8-Bit Comparator
Match
M U X
T0INT (IRQ0) INTPND.1 Pending T0OUT (P3.7) (Match INT)
Timer 0 Buffer Register Match Signal T0CON.2 T0OVF Timer 0 Data Register
T0CON.4-.3
Figure 10-5. Simplified Timer 0 Function Diagram: Interval Timer Mode
10-8
S3C825A/P825A
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
Pulse Width Modulation Mode Pulse width modulation (PWM) mode lets you program the width (duration) of the pulse that is output at the T0PWM (P3.7) pin. As in interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the value written to the timer 0 data register. In PWM mode, however, the match signal does not clear the counter. Instead, it runs continuously, overflowing at "FFH", and then continues incrementing from "00H". Although you can use the match signal to generate a timer 0 overflow interrupt, interrupts are not typically used in PWM-type applications. Instead, the pulse at the T0PWM (P3.7) pin is held to Low level as long as the reference data value is less than or equal to ( ) the counter value and then the pulse is held to High level for as long as the data value is greater than ( > ) the counter value. One pulse width is equal to tCLK x 256 (see Figure 10-6).
T0CON.0 T0OVF(IRQ0) CLK 8-Bit Up Counter INTPND.0 (Overflow INT)
Capture Signal
Interrupt Enable/Disable T0CON.1
8-Bit Comparator
Match
M U X
T0INT (IRQ0) INTPND.1 Pending (Match INT) T0PWM Output (P3.7) High level when data > counter, Lower level when data < counter
Timer 0 Buffer Register Match Signal T0CON.2 T0OVF Timer 0 Data Register
T0CON.4-.3
Figure 10-6. Simplified Timer 0 Function Diagram: PWM Mode
10-9
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
S3C825A/P825A
Capture Mode In capture mode, a signal edge that is detected at the T0CAP (P3.7) pin opens a gate and loads the current counter value into the timer 0 data register. You can select rising or falling edges to trigger this operation. Timer 0 also gives you capture input source: the signal edge at the T0CAP (P3.7) pin. You select the capture input by setting the values of the timer 0 capture input selection bits in the port 3 control register, P3CONH.7-.6, (set 1, bank 1, E4H). When P3CONH.7-.6 is "00", the T0CAP input is selected. Both kinds of timer 0 interrupts can be used in capture mode: the timer 0 overflow interrupt is generated whenever a counter overflow occurs; the timer 0 match/capture interrupt is generated whenever the counter value is loaded into the timer 0 data register. By reading the captured data value in T0DATA, and assuming a specific value for the timer 0 clock frequency, you can calculate the pulse width (duration) of the signal that is being input at the T0CAP pin (see Figure 10-7).
T0CON.0 T0OVF(IRQ0) CLK 8-Bit Up Counter INTPND.0 (Overflow INT)
Interrupt Enable/Disable T0CON.1 M U X T0INT (IRQ0) INTPND.1 Pending (Capture INT)
T0CAP input (P3.7) T0CON.4-.3
Match Signal
T0CON.4-.3 Timer 0 Data Register
Figure 10-7. Simplified Timer 0 Function Diagram: Capture Mode
10-10
S3C825A/P825A
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
T0CON.0 T0CON.7-.5 Data BUS fxx/1024 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx/1 T0CLK MUX 8 8-Bit Up Counter R (Read-Only) OVF INTPND.0 T0CON.2 Clear T0CON.1 M U X T0INT INTPND.1 (IRQ0) T0OUT T0PWM T0CON.4-.3 Match signal T0CON.2 T0OVF Timer 0 Data Register 8 Data BUS T0OVF (IRQ0)
8-Bit Comparator Match M U X Timer 0 Buffer Register
T0CAP
T0CON.4-.3
Figure 10-8. Timer 0 Block Diagram
10-11
BASIC TIMER and TIMER 0
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
10-12
S3C825A/P825A
TIMER 1
11
OVERVIEW
TIMER 1
ONE 16-BIT TIMER MODE (TIMER 1)
The 16-bit timer 1 is used in one 16-bit timer or two 8-bit timers mode. When TACON.7 is set to "1", it is in one 16-bit timer mode. When TACON.7 is set to "0", the timer 1 is used as two 8-bit timers. -- One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 1) -- Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A and B)
The 16-bit timer 1 is an 16-bit general-purpose timer. Timer 1 includes interval timer mode using appropriate TACON setting. Timer 1 has the following functional components: -- Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 256, 64, 8, or 1 and T1CLK: External clock) with multiplexer -- 16-bit counter (TACNT, TBCNT), 16-bit comparator, and 16-bit reference data register (TADATA, TBDATA) -- Timer 1 match interrupt (IRQ1, vector E6H) generation -- Timer 1 control register, TACON (set 1, bank 0,EBH, read/write)
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Interval Timer Function The timer 1 module can generate an interrupt, the timer 1 match interrupt (T1INT). T1INT belongs to the interrupt level IRQ1, and is assigned a separate vector address, E6H. The T1INT pending condition should be cleared by software after IRQ1 is serviced. The T1INT pending bit must be cleared by the application sub-routine by writing a "0" to the TACON.0 pending bit. In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the values written to the T1 reference data registers, TADATA and TBDATA. The match signal generates a timer 1 match interrupt (T1INT, vector E6H) and clears the counter. If, for example, you write the value 10H and 32H to TADATA and TBDATA, respectively, and 8EH to TACON, the counter will increment until it reaches 3210H. At this point, the T1 interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes.
11-1
TIMER 1
S3C825A/P825A
Timer 1 Control Register (TACON) You use the timer 1 control register, TACON, to -- Enable the timer 1 operating (interval timer) -- Select the timer 1 input clock frequency -- Clear the timer 1 counter, TACNT and TBCNT -- Enable the timer 1 interrupt -- Clear timer 1 interrupt pending conditions TACON is located in set 1, bank 0, at address EBH, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode. A reset clears TACON to "00H". This sets timer 1 to disable interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency of fxx/256, and disables timer 1 interrupt. You can clear the timer 1 counter at any time during the normal operation by writing a "1" to TACON.3. To enable the timer 1 interrupt (IRQ1, vector E6H), you must write TACON.7, TACON.2, and TACON.1 to "1". To generate the exact time interval, you should set TACON.3 and TACON.0 to "10B", which clear counter and interrupt pending bit. When the T1INT sub-routine is serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the timer 1 interrupt pending bit, TACON.0.
Timer 1 Control Register (TACON) EBH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Timer 1 operation mode selection bit: 0 = Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A/B) 1 = One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 1) Timer 1 clock selection bits: 000 = fxx/256 001 = fxx/64 010 = fxx/8 011 = fxx 111 = T1CLK (external clock rising edge)
Timer 1 interrupt pending bit: 0 = No interrupt pending 0 = Clear pending bit (when write) 1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) 1 = No effect (when write) Timer 1 interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable interrupt 1 = Enable interrupt Timer 1 counter run enable bit: 0 = Disable counter running 1 = Enable counter running
Timer 1 counter clear bit: 0 = No affect 1 = Clear the timer 1 counter (when write)
Figure 11-1. Timer 1 Control Register (TACON)
11-2
S3C825A/P825A
TIMER 1
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Bit 6, 5, 4 T1CLK fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx/1 MUX Data Bus 8 Bit 3
16-Bit Up-Counter Clear (Read Only) MSB LSB Match Pending Bit 0 Bit 1 Timer 1 Buffer Register (16-bit)
16-Bit Comparator Bit 2
T1INT IRQ1 TAOUT
Counter Clear Signal Match Signal Timer 1 Data Register (Read/Write) MSB LSB 16
NOTE:
When TACON.7 is "1", 16-bit timer 1.
Figure 11-2. Timer 1 Functional Block Diagram
11-3
TIMER 1
S3C825A/P825A
TWO 8-BIT TIMERS MODE (TIMER A and B)
OVERVIEW The 8-bit timer A and B are the 8-bit general-purpose timers. Timer A and B support interval timer mode using appropriate TACON and TBCON setting, respectively. Timer A and B have the following functional components: -- Clock frequency divider with multiplexer - fxx divided by 256, 64, 8, or 1 and T1CLK (External clock) for timer A - fxx divided by 256, 64, 8, or 1 for timer B -- 8-bit counter (TACNT, TBCNT), 8-bit comparator, and 8-bit reference data register (TADATA, TBDATA) -- Timer A match interrupt (IRQ1, vector E6H) generation -- Timer A control register, TACON (set 1, bank 0, EBH, read/write) -- Timer B match interrupt (IRQ1, vector E4H) generation -- Timer B control register, TBCON (set 1, bank 0, EAH, read/write)
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Interval Timer Function The timer A and B module can generate an interrupt: the timer A match interrupt (TAINT) and the timer B match interrupt (TBINT). TAINT belongs to the interrupt level IRQ1, and is assigned a separate vector address, E6H. TBINT belongs to the interrupt level IRQ1 and is assigned a separate vector address, E4H. The TAINT and TBINT pending condition should be cleared by software after they are serviced. In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the values written to the TA or TB reference data registers, TADATA or TBDATA. The match signal generates corresponding match interrupt (TAINT, vector E6H; TBINT, vector E4H) and clears the counter. If, for example, you write the value 10H to TBDATA, "0" to TACON.7, and 0EH to TBCON, the counter will increment until it reaches 10H. At this point, the TB interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes. Timer A and B Control Register (TACON, TBCON) You use the timer A and B control register, TACON and TBCON, to -- Enable the timer A and B operating (interval timer) -- Select the timer A and B input clock frequency -- Clear the timer A and B counter, TACNT and TBCNT -- Enable the timer A and B interrupt -- Clear timer A and B interrupt pending conditions
11-4
S3C825A/P825A
TIMER 1
TACON and TBCON are located in set 1, bank 0, at address EBH and EAH, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode. A reset clears TACON and TBCON to "00H". This sets timer A and B to disable interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency of fxx/256, and disables timer A and B interrupt. You can clear the timer A and B counter at any time during normal operation by writing a "1" to TACON.3 and TBCON.3. To enable the timer A and B interrupt (IRQ1, vector E6H, E4H), you must write TACON.7 to "0", TACON.2 (TBCON.2) and TACON.1 (TBCON.1) to "1". To generate the exact time interval, you should set TACON.3 (TBCON.3) and TACON.0 (TBCON.0) to "10B", which clear counter and interrupt pending bit, respectively. When the TAINT or TBINT sub-routine is serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the timer A or B interrupt pending bits, TACON.0 or TBCON.0.
Timer A Control Register (TACON) EBH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Timer 1 operation mode selection bit: 0 = Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A/B) 1 = One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 1) Timer A clock selection bits: 000 = fxx/256 001 = fxx/64 010 = fxx/8 011 = fxx 111 = T1CLK (external clock rising edge)
Timer A interrupt pending bit: 0 = No interrupt pending 0 = Clear pending bit (when write) 1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) 1 = No effect (when write) Timer A interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable interrupt 1 = Enable interrupt Timer A counter run enable bit: 0 = Disable counter running 1 = Enable counter running
Timer A counter clear bit: 0 = No affect 1 = Clear the timer A counter (when write)
Figure 11-3. Timer A Control Register (TACON)
11-5
TIMER 1
S3C825A/P825A
Timer B Control Register (TBCON) EAH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Not used the S3C825A. Timer B clock selection bits: 00 = fxx/256 01 = fxx/64 10 = fxx/8 11 = fxx
Timer B interrupt pending bit: 0 = No interrupt pending 0 = Clear pending bit (when write) 1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) 1 = No effect (when write) Timer B interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable interrupt 1 = Enable interrupt Timer B counter run enable bit: 0 = Disable counter running 1 = Enable counter running
Timer B counter clear bit: 0 = No affect 1 = Clear the timer B counter (when write)
Figure 11-4. Timer B Control Register (TBCON)
11-6
S3C825A/P825A
TIMER 1
TACON.6-.4 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx TACON.2 T1CLK TA Buffer Register MUX Comparator TACNT R
TACON.3 Clear
Match TAOUT TACON.0 Pending
TACON.1 TA Counter Clear Signal, TA Match Signal TB Counter Clear Signal, TB Match Signal TADATA IRQ1 TBDATA TBCON.1
TB Buffer Register fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx MUX TBCNT R TBCON.2 Comparator
TBCON.0 Pending TBOUT
Match
Clear TBCON.3 TBCON.5-.4 NOTE: When TACON.7 is "0", two 8-bit timer A/B.
Figure 11-5. Timer A and B Function Block Diagram
11-7
TIMER 1
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
11-8
S3C825A/P825A
8-BIT TIMER 2
12
OVERVIEW
8-BIT TIMER 2
The 8-bit timer 2 is an 8-bit general-purpose timer. Timer 2 has the interval timer mode by using the appropriate T2CON setting. Timer 2 has the following functional components: -- Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 256, 64, 8 or 1) with multiplexer -- External clock input (P2.2/T2CLK) -- 8-bit counter (T2CNT), 8-bit comparator, and 8-bit reference data register (T2DATA) -- Timer 2 interrupt (IRQ2, vector E8H) generation -- Timer 2 control register, T2CON (set 1, Bank 0, EEH, read/write)
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Interval Timer Function The timer 2 can generate an interrupt, the timer 2 match interrupt (T2INT). T2INT belongs to interrupt level IRQ2, and is assigned the separate vector address, E8H. The T2INT pending condition should be cleared by software when it has been serviced. Even though T2INT is disabled, the application's service routine can detect a pending condition of T2INT by the software and execute it's sub-routine. When this case is used, the T2INT pending bit must be cleared by the application subroutine by writing a "0" to the T2CON.0 pending bit. In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the values written to the Timer 2 reference data registers, T2DATA. The match signal generates a timer 2 match interrupt (T2INT, vector E8H) and clears the counter. If, for example, you write the value 10H to T2DATA and 0EH to T2CON, the counter will increment until it reaches 10H. At this point, the Timer 2 interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes.
12-1
8-BIT 2
S3C825A/P825A
TIMER 2 CONTROL REGISTER (T2CON) You use the timer 2 control register, T2CON, to -- Enable the timer 2 operating (interval timer) -- Select the timer 2 input clock frequency -- Clear the timer 2 counter, T2CNT -- Enable the timer 2 interrupt and clear timer 2 interrupt pending condition T2CON is located in set 1, bank 0, at address EEH, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode. A reset clears T2CON to "00H". This sets timer 2 to disable interval timer mode, and disables timer 2 interrupt. You can clear the timer 2 counter at any time during normal operation by writing a "1" to T2CON.3 To enable the timer 2 interrupt (IRQ2, vector E8H), you must write T2CON.2, and T2CON.1 to "1". To detect an interrupt pending condition when T2INT is disabled, the application program polls pending bit, T2CON.0. When a "1" is detected, a timer 2 interrupt is pending. When the T2INT sub-routine has been serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the timer 2 interrupt pending bit, T2CON.0.
Timer 2 Control Register EEH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Timer 2 input clock selection bits: 000 = fxx/256 001 = fxx/64 010 = fxx/8 011 = fxx 111= External clock (T2CLK) input Not used Timer 2 counter clear bit: 0 = No affect 1 = Clear the timer 2 counter (when write)
Timer 2 interrupt pending bit: 0 = No interrupt pending 0 = Clear pending bit (when write) 1 = Interrupt is pending Timer 2 interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable interrupt 1 = Enable interrupt Timer 2 count enable bit: 0 = Disable counting operation 1 = Enable counting operation
Figure 12-1. Timer 2 Control Register (T2CON)
12-2
S3C825A/P825A
8-BIT TIMER 2
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Bits 7, 6, 5 Data Bus T2CLK (P2.2) 8 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx/1 X 8-bit Comparator Match Bit 2 Timer 2 Buffer Register Bit 1 Counter clear signal (T2CON.3), Match signal M U 8-bit up-Counter (Read Only) Bit 3
R Clear Pending Bit 0 T2INT IRQ2
Timer 2 Data Register (Read/Write)
8 Data Bus
Figure 12-2. Timer 2 Functional Block Diagram
12-3
8-BIT 2
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
12-4
S3C825A/P825A
16-BIT TIMER 3
13
OVERVIEW
-- PWM mode
16-BIT TIMER 3
Timer/counter 3 has three operating modes, one of which you select using the appropriate T3CON setting: -- Interval timer mode -- Capture input mode with a rising or falling edge trigger at the P3.6 pin
Timer/counter 3 has the following functional components: -- Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 1024, 256, 64, 8, or 1) with multiplexer -- External clock input (P3.5, T3CLK) -- 16-bit counter(T3CNTH,T3CNTL), 16-bit comparator, and 16-bit reference data register(T3DATAH,T3DATAL) -- I/O pins for capture input, match output, or PWM output (P3.6/T3CAP, P3.6/T3OUT, P3.6/T3PWM) -- Timer 3 overflow interrupt (IRQ2, vector ECH) and match/capture interrupt (IRQ2, vector EAH) generation -- Timer 3 control register, T3CON (set 1, F8H, bank 0, read/write)
TIMER/COUNTER 3 CONTROL REGISTER (T3CON)
You use the timer 3 control register, T3CON, to -- Select the timer 3 operating mode (interval timer, capture mode, or PWM mode) -- Select the timer 3 input clock frequency -- Clear the timer 3 counter, T3CNTH/T3CNTL -- Enable the timer 3 overflow interrupt or timer 3 match/capture interrupt -- Clear timer 3 match/capture interrupt pending condition
13-1
16-BIT TIMER 3
S3C825A/P825A
T3CON is located in set 1, bank 0, at address F8H, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode. A reset clears T3CON to "00H". This sets timer 3 to normal interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency of fxx/1024, and disables all timer 3 interrupts. You can clear the timer 3 counter at any time during normal operation by writing a "1" to T3CON.2. The timer 3 overflow interrupt (T3OVF) is interrupt level IRQ2 and has the vector address ECH. When a timer 3 overflow interrupt occurs and is serviced by the CPU, the pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware or must be cleared by software. To enable the timer 3 match/capture interrupt (IRQ2, vector EAH), you must write T3CON.1 to "1". To detect a match/capture interrupt pending condition, the application program polls INTPND.3. When a "1" is detected, a timer 3 match or capture interrupt is pending. When the interrupt request has been serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the timer 3 match/capture interrupt pending bit, INTPND.3.
Timer 3 Control Register (T3CON) F8H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Timer 3 input clock selection bits: 000 = fxx/1024 001 = fxx/256 010 = fxx/64 011 = fxx/8 100 = fxx 101 = External clock (P3.5/T3CLK) falling edge 110 = External clock (P3.5/T3CLK) rising edge 111 = Counter stop
Timer 3 overflow interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable overflow interrupt 1 = Enable overflow interrupt Timer 3 match/capture interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable interrupt 1 = Enable interrupt Timer 3 counter clear bit: 0 = No effect 1 = Clear the timer 3 counter (when write)
Timer 3 operating mode selection bits: 00 = Interval mode (P3.6/T3OUT) 01 = Capture mode (capture on rising edge, counter running, OVF can occur) 10 = Capture mode (capture on falling edge, counter running, OVF can occur) 11 = PWM mode (OVF and match interrupt can occur)
Figure 13-1. Timer 3 Control Register (T3CON)
13-2
S3C825A/P825A
16-BIT TIMER 3
Interrupt Pending Register (INTPND) D0H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Not used
Timer 0 overflow interrupt pending bit Timer 0 match/capture interrupt pending bit Timer 3 overflow interrupt pending bit Timer 3 match/capture interrupt pending bit Tx interrupt pending bit (for UART) Rx interrupt pending bit (for UART): 0 = Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write "0". 1 = Interrupt request is pending
Figure 13-2. Interrupt Pending Register (INTPND)
13-3
16-BIT TIMER 3
S3C825A/P825A
TIMER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Timer 3 Interrupts (IRQ2, Vectors EAH and ECH) The timer 3 can generate two interrupts: the timer 3 overflow interrupt (T3OVF), and the timer 3 match/ capture interrupt (T3INT). T3OVF is belongs to interrupt level IRQ2, vector ECH. T3INT also belongs to interrupt level IRQ2, but is assigned the separate vector address, EAH. A timer 3 overflow interrupt pending condition is automatically cleared by hardware when it has been serviced or should be cleared by software in the interrupt service routine by writing a "0" to the INTPND.2 interrupt pending bit. However, the timer 3 match/capture interrupt pending condition must be cleared by the application's interrupt service routine by writing a "0" to the INTPND.3 interrupt pending bit. Interval Timer Mode In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the value written to the timer 3 reference data register, T3DATAH/T3DATAL. The match signal generates a timer 3 match interrupt (T3INT, vector EAH) and clears the counter. If, for example, you write the value "1087H" to T3DATAH/T3DATAL, the counter will increment until it reaches "1087H". At this point, the timer 3 interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes. With each match, the level of the signal at the timer 3 output pin is inverted (see Figure 13-3).
Capture Signal CLK 16-Bit Up Counter R (Clear)
Interrupt Enable/Disable T3CON.1
16-Bit Comparator
Match
M U X
T3INT (IRQ2) INTPND.3 Pending T3OUT (P3.6) (Match INT)
Timer 3 Buffer Register Match Signal T3CON.2 T3OVF Timer 3 Data Register
T3CON.4-.3
Figure 13-3. Simplified Timer 3 Function Diagram: Interval Timer Mode
13-4
S3C825A/P825A
16-BIT TIMER 3
Pulse Width Modulation Mode Pulse width modulation (PWM) mode lets you program the width (duration) of the pulse that is output at the T3PWM (P3.6) pin. As in interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the value written to the timer 3 data register. In PWM mode, however, the match signal does not clear the counter. Instead, it runs continuously, overflowing at "FFFFH", and then continues incrementing from "0000H". Although you can use the match signal to generate a timer 3 overflow interrupt, interrupts are not typically used in PWM-type applications. Instead, the pulse at the T3PWM (P3.6) pin is held to Low level as long as the reference data value is less than or equal to ( ) the counter value and then the pulse is held to High level for as long as the data value is greater than ( > ) the counter value. One pulse width is equal to tCLK x 65536 (see Figure 13-4).
T3CON.0 T3OVF(IRQ2) CLK 16-Bit Up Counter INTPND.2 (Overflow INT)
Capture Signal
Interrupt Enable/Disable T3CON.1
16-Bit Comparator
Match
M U X
T3INT (IRQ2) INTPND.3 Pending (Match INT) T3PWM Output (P3.6) High level when data > counter, Lower level when data < counter
Timer 3 Buffer Register Match Signal T3CON.2 T3OVF Timer 3 Data Register
T3CON.4-.3
Figure 13-4. Simplified Timer 3 Function Diagram: PWM Mode
13-5
16-BIT TIMER 3
S3C825A/P825A
Capture Mode In capture mode, a signal edge that is detected at the T3CAP (P3.6) pin opens a gate and loads the current counter value into the timer 3 data register. You can select rising or falling edges to trigger this operation. Timer 3 also gives you capture input source: the signal edge at the T3CAP (P3.6) pin. You select the capture input by setting the values of the timer 3 capture input selection bits in the port 3 control register, P3CONH.5-.4, (set 1, bank 1, E4H). When P3CONH.5-.4 is "00", the T3CAP input is selected. Both kinds of timer 3 interrupts can be used in capture mode: the timer 3 overflow interrupt is generated whenever a counter overflow occurs; the timer 3 match/capture interrupt is generated whenever the counter value is loaded into the timer 3 data register. By reading the captured data value in T3DATAH/T3DATAL, and assuming a specific value for the timer 3 clock frequency, you can calculate the pulse width (duration) of the signal that is being input at the T3CAP pin (see Figure 13-5).
T3CON.0 T3OVF(IRQ2) CLK 16-Bit Up Counter INTPND.2 (Overflow INT)
Interrupt Enable/Disable T3CON.1 M U X T3INT (IRQ2) INTPND.3 Pending (Capture INT)
T3CAP input (P3.6) T3CON.4-.3
Match Signal
T3CON.4-.3 Timer 3 Data Register
Figure 13-5. Simplified Timer 3 Function Diagram: Capture Mode
13-6
S3C825A/P825A
16-BIT TIMER 3
T3CON.0 T3CON.7-.5 Data BUS fxx/1024 fxx/256 fxx/64 fxx/8 fxx/1 T3CLK MUX 8 16-Bit Up Counter R (Read-Only) OVF INTPND.2 T3CON.2 Clear T3CON.1 M U X T3INT INTPND.3 (IRQ2) T3OUT T3PWM T3CON.4-.3 Match signal T3CON.2 T3OVF Timer 3 Data Register 8 Data BUS T3OVF (IRQ2)
16-Bit Comparator Match M U X Timer 3 Buffer Register
T3CAP
T3CON.4-.3
Figure 13-6. Timer 3 Block Diagram
13-7
16-BIT TIMER 3
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
13-8
S3C825A/P825A
WATCH TIMER
14
OVERVIEW
WATCH TIMER
Watch timer functions include real-time and watch-time measurement and interval timing for the system clock. To start watch timer operation, set bit 1 of the watch timer control register, WTCON.1 to "1". And if you want to service watch timer overflow interrupt (IRQ4, vector D6H), then set the WTCON.6 to "1". The watch timer overflow interrupt pending condition (WTCON.0) must be cleared by software in the application's interrupt service routine by means of writing a "0" to the WTCON.0 interrupt pending bit. After the watch timer starts and elapses a time, the watch timer interrupt pending bit (WTCON.0) is automatically set to "1", and interrupt requests commence in 3.91 ms, 0.25, 0.5 and 1-second intervals by setting Watch timer speed selection bits (WTCON.3 - .2). The watch timer can generate a steady 0.5 kHz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, or 4 kHz signal to BUZ output pin for Buzzer. By setting WTCON.3 and WTCON.2 to "11b", the watch timer will function in high-speed mode, generating an interrupt every 3.91 ms. High-speed mode is useful for timing events for program debugging sequences. The watch timer supplies the clock frequency for the LCD controller (fLCD). Therefore, if the watch timer is disabled, the LCD controller does not operate. Watch timer has the following functional components: -- Real Time and Watch-Time Measurement -- Using a Main Clock Source or Sub clock -- Clock Source Generation for LCD Controller (fLCD ) -- I/O pin for Buzzer Output Frequency Generator (P5.3, BUZ) -- Timing Tests in High-Speed Mode -- Watch timer overflow interrupt (IRQ4, vector D6H) generation -- Watch timer control register, WTCON (set 1, bank 1, EFH, read/write)
14-1
WATCH TIMER
S3C825A/P825A
WATCH TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (WTCON) The watch timer control register, WTCON is used to select the watch timer interrupt time and Buzzer signal, to enable or disable the watch timer function. It is located in set 1, bank 1 at address EFH, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode. A reset clears WTCON to "00H". This disable the watch timer. So, if you want to use the watch timer, you must write appropriate value to WTCON.
Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON) EFH, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Watch timer clock selection bit: 0 = Select main clock divided by 27 (fx/128) 1 = Select Sub clock (fxt) Watch timer INT Enable/Disable bit: 0 = Disable watch timer INT 1 = Enable watch timer INT Buzzer signal selection bits: 00 = 0.5 kHz 01 = 1 kHz 10 = 2 kHz 11 = 4 kHz
Watch timer interrupt pending bit: 0 = Interrupt request is not pending (Clear pending bit when write"0") 1 = Interrupt request is pending Watch timer Enable/Disable bit: 0 = Disable watch timer 1 = Enable watch timer Watch timer speed selection bits: 00 = Set watch timer interrupt to 1 s 01 = Set watch timer interrupt to 0.5 s 10 = Set watch timer interrupt to 0.25 s 11 = Set watch timer interrupt to 3.91 ms
Figure 14-1. Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON)
14-2
S3C825A/P825A
WATCH TIMER
WATCH TIMER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
WTCON.7 WTCON.6 WTCON.5 8 WTCON.4 WTCON.3 WTCON.2 WTCON.1 WTCON.0
(Pending Bit)
WT INT Enable WTCON.6 MUX fW/16 (0.5 kHz) fW/8 (1 kHz) fW/4 (2 kHz) fW/2 (4 kHz) Enable/Disable Selector Circuit
BUZ (P5.3)
WTINT
WTCON.0
Clock Selector
fW 32.768 kHz
Frequency Dividing Circuit
fW/27 fW/213 fW/214 fW/215 (1 Hz) fLCD = 2048 Hz
fxt
fX/128
fX = Main clock (where fx = 4.19 MHz) fxt = Sub clock (32.768 kHz) fW = Watch timer frequency
Figure 14-2. Watch Timer Circuit Diagram
14-3
WATCH TIMER
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
14-4
S3C825A/P825A
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
15
OVERVIEW
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
The S3C825A microcontroller can directly drive an up-to-224-dot (28 segments x 8 commons) LCD panel. Its LCD block has the following components: -- LCD controller/driver -- Display RAM for storing display data -- 4 common/segment output pins (COM4/SEG0-COM7/SEG3) -- 28 segment output pins (SEG4-SEG31) -- 4 common output pins (COM0-COM3) -- Internal resistor circuit for LCD bias -- VLC1 pin for controlling the driver and bias voltage The LCD control register, LCON, is used to turn the LCD display on and off, switch the current to the dividing resistors for the LCD display, and frame frequency. Data written to the LCD display RAM can be automatically transferred to the segment signal pins without any program control. When a subsystem clock is selected as the LCD clock source, the LCD display is enabled even in the main clock stop or idle mode.
VLC1 1 LCD Controller/ Driver COM0-COM3 4 4 28 COM4-COM7/ SEG0-SEG3 SEG4-SEG31 8-Bit Data Bus
8
Figure 15-1. LCD Function Diagram
15-1
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C825A/P825A
LCD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SEG31/P1.7 Display RAM (Page 7) fLC
32
Selector
SEG4/P7.0
Data Bus
Timing Controller
COM Control or Selector
COM7/SEG3/P6.7 COM6/SEG2/P6.6 COM5/SEG1/P6.5 COM4/SEG0/P6.4 COM3/P6.3
LMOD
COM Control
COM2/P6.2 COM1/P6.1 COM0/P6.0
LCON
LCD Voltage Control
VLC1
Figure 15-2. LCD Circuit Diagram
15-2
S3C825A/P825A
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
LCD RAM ADDRESS AREA RAM addresses of page 7 are used as LCD data memory. These locations can be addressed by 1-bit or 8-bit instructions. If the bit value of a display segment is "1", the LCD display is turned on. If the bit value is "0", the display is turned off. Display RAM data are sent out through the segment pins, SEG0-SEG31, using the direct memory access (DMA) method that is synchronized with the fLCD signal. RAM addresses in this location that are not used for LCD display can be allocated to general-purpose use.
COM COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7
Bit .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
SEG0
SEG1
SEG2
SEG3
SEG4
------
SEG30
SEG31
700H
701H
702H
703H
704H
------
71EH
71FH
Figure 15-3. LCD Display Data RAM Organization
15-3
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C825A/P825A
LCD CONTROL REGISTER (LCON) The LCD control register (LCON) is used to turn the LCD display on and off, LCD frame frequency, and control the flow of the current to the dividing resistors in the LCD circuit. After a RESET, all LCON values are cleared to "0". This turns the LCD display off and stops the flow of the current to the dividing resistors.
LCD Control Register (LCON) F2H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Not used for the S3C825A. LCD display control bits: 00 = Display off, P-Tr off 01 = Normal display (Using VLC1 with external voltage), P-Tr off 11 = Normal display (Using VLC1 with internal voltage), P-Tr on
LCD clock select bits: 00 = fw/27(256 Hz at fw = 32.768 kHz) 01 = fw/26(512 Hz at fw = 32.768 kHz) 10 = fw/25(1024 Hz at fw = 32.768 kHz) 11 = fw/24(2048 Hz at fw = 32.768 kHz)
LCD duty and bias selection bits: 00 = 1/3 duty, 1/3 bias; COM0-2/SEG0-31 01 = 1/4 duty, 1/3 bias; COM0-3/SEG0-31 10 = 1/8 duty, 1/4 bias; COM0-7/SEG4-31 11 = 1/8 duty, 1/5 bias; COM0-7/SEG4-31
Figure 15-4. LCD Control Register (LCON)
15-4
S3C825A/P825A
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
LCD MODE CONTROL REGISTER (LMOD), F3H at BANK 0 of SET 1 Table 15-1. LCD Mode Control Register (LMOD) Organization LCON Bit LMOD.7-.4 LMOD.3-.0 Setting Not used for the S3C825A. 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 All I/O port (P0, P1, P6-P8) Select LCD COM0-3, COM4-7/SEG0-3. P0, P1, P7, and P8 are I/O port. Select LCD COM0-3, COM4-7/SEG0-3, SEG4-7. P0, P1, P7.4-P7.7, and P8 are I/O port. Select LCD COM0-3, COM4-7/SEG0-3, SEG4-11. P0, P1, and P8 are I/O port. Select LCD COM0-3, COM4-7/SEG0-3, SEG4-15. P0 and P1are I/O port. Select LCD COM0-3, COM4-7/SEG0-3, SEG4-19. P0.4-P0.7 and P1 are I/O port. Select LCD COM0-3, COM4-7/SEG0-3, SEG4-23. P1 is I/O port. Select LCD COM0-3, COM4-7/SEG0-3, SEG4-27. P1.4-P1.7 is I/O port. Select LCD COM0-3, COM4-7/SEG0-3, SEG4-31. Description
NOTE: The COM4-7/SEG0-3 signals are controlled by LCON.3-.2.
15-5
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C825A/P825A
LCD VOLTAGE DIVIDING RESISTORS On-chip voltage dividing resistors for the LCD drive power supply are fixed to the VLC1-VLC5 pins. Figure 15-5 shows the bias connections for the S3C825A LCD drive power supply. To cut off the flow of current through the dividing resistor, manipulate bits 7 and 6 of the LCON register.
1/5 Bias
1/4 Bias
1/3 Bias
S3C825A
VDD LCON.7-.6 VLC1 VLC2 R VLC3 R VLC1
S3C825A
VDD LCON.7-.6 VLC1 VLC2 R VLC3 R VLC1
S3C825A
VDD LCON.7-.6 VLC1 VLC2 R VLC3 R VLC1
VLC4 R VLC5 R VSS R R
VLC4 R VLC5 R VSS R R
VLC4 R VLC5 R VSS R R
Figure 15-5. LCD Bias Circuit Connection
15-6
S3C825A/P825A
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
In Case of Internal VDD
S3C825A
VDD LCON.7-.6 VLC1 VLC2 R VLC3 R On VLC1
VLC4 R VLC5 R VSS R R
NOTE:
For power-saving and LCD-off, LCON.7-.6 must be set to 00B. For a normal display, LCON.7-.6 must be set to 11B.
Figure 15-6. Example 1 for the Usage of LCON.7-.6
15-7
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C825A/P825A
In Case of Internal VDD
S3C825A
VDD LCON.7-.6 VLC1 VLC2 R VLC3 R VLC1 Off VDD
VLC4 R VLC5 R VSS R R
NOTE: For power-saving and LCD-off, LCON.7-.6 must be set to 00B. For a normal display, LCON.7-.6 must be set to 01B.
Figure 15-7. Example 2 for the Usage of LCON.7-.6
15-8
S3C825A/P825A
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
SEG2
SEG1 SEG0 FR
0
1
2
0
1
2 VLC1 VSS
COM0
1 FRAME VLC1
COM1 COM2
COM0
VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VSS VLC1
COM1
VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VSS VLC1
COM2
VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VSS VLC1
SEG0
VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VSS VLC1
SEG1
VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VSS + V LC1 + 1/3 V LC1
SEG0-COM0
0V - 1/3 V LC1 - V LC1
Figure 15-8. LCD Signal Waveforms (1/3 Duty, 1/3 Bias)
15-9
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C825A/P825A
SEG1 SEG0 FR COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM0
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3 VLC1 VSS
1 FRAME VLC1 VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VSS VLC1 VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VSS VLC1 VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VSS VLC1 VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VLC1 VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VSS VLC1 VLC2 (VLC3) VLC4 (VLC5) VSS + VLC1 + 1/3 V LC1 SEG0-COM0 0V - 1/3 V LC1 - VLC1
COM1
COM2
COM3
SEG0
SEG1
Figure 15-9. LCD Signal Waveforms (1/4 Duty, 1/3 Bias)
15-10
S3C825A/P825A
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 S E G 5 S E G 6 S E G 7 S E G 8 S E G 9
0 FR
123456701234567
VLC1 VSS
1 FRAME VLC1 VLC2 COM0 VLC3 (VLC4) VLC5 VSS VLC1 VLC2 COM1 VLC3 (VLC4) VLC5 VSS VLC1 VLC2 COM2 VLC3 (VLC4) VLC5 VSS VLC1 VLC2 VLC3 (VLC4) SEG5 VLC5 VSS VLC1 VLC2 VLC3 (VLC4) VLC5 SEG5-COM0 0V -VLC5 -VLC3 ( -VLC4) -VLC2 -VLC1
Figure 15-10. LCD Signal Waveforms (1/8 Duty, 1/4 Bias)
15-11
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C825A/P825A
0123456701234567 FR 1 FRAME VLC1 VSS
VLC1 VLC2 SEG6 VLC3 (VLC4) VLC5 VSS
VLC1 VLC2 VLC3 (VLC4) VLC5 SEG6-COM0 0V -VLC5 -VLC3 (-VLC4) -VLC2 -VLC1
Figure 15-10. LCD Signal Waveforms (1/8 Duty, 1/4 Bias) (Continued)
15-12
S3C825A/P825A
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 S E G 5 S E G 6 S E G 7 S E G 8 S E G 9
0123 FR 1 FRAME
7 0123
7 VLC1 VSS
VLC1 VLC2 COM0 VLC3 VLC4 VLC5 Vss VLC1 VLC2 COM1 VLC3 VLC4 VLC5 VSS VLC1 VLC2 COM2 VLC3 VLC4 VLC5 VSS VLC1 VLC2 SEG5 VLC3 VLC4 VLC5 VSS
Figure 15-11. LCD Signal Waveforms (1/8 Duty, 1/5 Bias)
15-13
LCD CONTROLLER/DRIVER
S3C825A/P825A
0123 FR 1 FRAME
7 0123
7 VLC1 VSS
VLC1 VLC2 SEG6 VLC3 VLC4 VLC5 VSS VLC1 VLC2 VLC3 VLC4 VLC5 SEG5-COM0 0V -VLC5 -VLC4 -VLC3 -VLC2 -VLC1 VLC1 VLC2 VLC3 VLC4 VLC5 SEG6-COM0 0V -VLC5 -VLC4 -VLC3 -VLC2 -VLC1
Figure 15-11. LCD Signal Waveforms (1/8 Duty, 1/5 Bias) (Continued)
15-14
S3C825A/P825A
A/D CONVERTER
16
OVERVIEW
10-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER
The 10-bit A/D converter (ADC) module uses successive approximation logic to convert analog levels entering at one of the four input channels to equivalent 10-bit digital values. The analog input level must lie between the AVREF and AVSS values. The A/D converter has the following components: -- Analog comparator with successive approximation logic -- D/A converter logic (resistor string type) -- ADC control register (ADCON) -- Four multiplexed analog data input pins (AD0-AD3) -- 10-bit A/D conversion data output register (ADDATAH/ADDATAL) -- 4-bit digital input port (Alternately, I/O port)
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
To initiate an analog-to-digital conversion procedure, at first you must set with alternative function for ADC input enable at port 3, the pin set with alternative function can be used for ADC analog input. And you write the channel selection data in the A/D converter control register ADCON.4-.5 to select one of the four analog input pins (AD0-3) and set the conversion start or enable bit, ADCON.0. The read-write ADCON register is located in set 1, bank 0, at address EFH. The pins witch are not used for ADC can be used for normal I/O. During a normal conversion, ADC logic initially sets the successive approximation register to 800H (the approximate half-way point of an 10-bit register). This register is then updated automatically during each conversion step. The successive approximation block performs 10-bit conversions for one input channel at a time. You can dynamically select different channels by manipulating the channel selection bit value (ADCON.5- 4) in the ADCON register. To start the A/D conversion, you should set the enable bit, ADCON.0. When a conversion is completed, ADCON.3, the end-of-conversion(EOC) bit is automatically set to 1 and the result is dumped into the ADDATAH/ADDATAL register where it can be read. The A/D converter then enters an idle state. Remember to read the contents of ADDATAH/ADDATAL before another conversion starts. Otherwise, the previous result will be overwritten by the next conversion result. NOTE Because the A/D converter has no sample-and-hold circuitry, it is very important that fluctuation in the analog level at the AD0-AD3 input pins during a conversion procedure be kept to an absolute minimum. Any change in the input level, perhaps due to noise, will invalidate the result. If the chip enters to STOP or IDLE mode in conversion process, there will be a leakage current path in A/D block. You must use STOP or IDLE mode after ADC operation is finished.
16-1
A/D CONVERTER
S3C825A/P825A
CONVERSION TIMING The A/D conversion process requires 4 steps (4 clock edges) to convert each bit and 10 clocks to set-up A/D conversion. Therefore, total of 50 clocks are required to complete an 10-bit conversion: When fxx/8 is selected for conversion clock with an 4.5 MHz fxx clock frequency, one clock cycle is 1.78 us. Each bit conversion requires 4 clocks, the conversion rate is calculated as follows: 4 clocks/bit x 10-bit + set-up time = 50 clocks, 50 clock x 1.78 us = 89 us at 0.56 MHz (4.5 MHz/8) Note that A/D converter needs at least 25s for conversion time. A/D CONVERTER CONTROL REGISTER (ADCON) The A/D converter control register, ADCON, is located at address EFH in set 1, bank 0. It has three functions: -- Analog input pin selection (bits 4 and 5) -- End-of-conversion status detection (bit 3) -- ADC clock selection (bits 2 and 1) -- A/D operation start or enable (bit 0 ) After a reset, the start bit is turned off. You can select only one analog input channel at a time. Other analog input pins (AD0-AD3) can be selected dynamically by manipulating the ADCON.4-5 bits. And the pins not used for analog input can be used for normal I/O function.
A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON) EFH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W (EOC bit is read-only) MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Always logic zero A/D input pin selection bits: 00 = AD0 01 = AD1 10 = AD2 11 = AD3
Start or enable bit 0 = Disable operation 1 = Start operation Clock Selection bits: 00 = fxx/16 01 = fxx/8 10 = fxx/4 11 = fxx/1
End-of-conversion bit 0 = Not complete Conversion 1 = complete Conversion
Figure 16-1. A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON)
16-2
S3C825A/P825A
A/D CONVERTER
Conversion Data Register ADDATAH/ADDATAL F0H/F1H, Set 1, Bank 0, Read Only MSB MSB .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .1 .2 .0 LSB LSB (ADDATAH) (ADDATAL)
Figure 16-2. A/D Converter Data Register (ADDATAH/ADDATAL)
INTERNAL REFERENCE VOLTAGE LEVELS In the ADC function block, the analog input voltage level is compared to the reference voltage. The analog input level must remain within the range AVSS to AVREF. Different reference voltage levels are generated internally along the resistor tree during the analog conversion process for each conversion step. The reference voltage level for the first conversion bit is always 1/2 AVREF.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
ADCON.2-.1 ADCON.4-5 (Select one input pin of the assigned pins)
Clock Selector
To ADCON.3 (EOC Flag)
ADCON.0 (AD/C Enable) M Input Pins AD0-AD3 (P3.0-P3.3) Analog Comparator Successive Approximation Logic & Register
. . .
U + X ADCON.0 (AD/C Enable)
P3CONL (Assign Pins to ADC Input) 10-bit D/A Converter
AVREF AVSS
Conversion Result (ADDATAH/ADDATAL, F0H/F1H, Set 1, Bank 0)
Figure 16-3. A/D Converter Functional Block Diagram
16-3
A/D CONVERTER
S3C825A/P825A
VDD Reference Voltage Input (AVREF VDD)
AVREF 10 F + C 103 VDD
Analog Input Pin C 101
AD0-AD3 S3C825A
AVSS
Figure 16-4. Recommended A/D Converter Circuit for Highest Absolute Accuracy
16-4
S3C825A/P825A
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
17
OVERVIEW
-- Clock selector logic
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
Serial I/O modules, SIO can interface with various types of external device that require serial data transfer. The components of SIO function block are: -- 8-bit control register (SIOCON) -- 8-bit data buffer (SIODATA) -- 8-bit prescaler (SIOPS) -- 3-bit serial clock counter -- Serial data I/O pins (SI, SO) -- External clock input/output pin (SCK) The SIO module can transmit or receive 8-bit serial data at a frequency determined by its corresponding control register settings. To ensure flexible data transmission rates, you can select an internal or external clock source. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE To program the SIO module, follow these basic steps: 1. Configure the I/O pins at port (SCK/SI/SO) by loading the appropriate value to the P5CONL register if necessary. 2. Load an 8-bit value to the SIOCON control register to properly configure the serial I/O module. In this operation, SIOCON.2 must be set to "1" to enable the data shifter. 3. For interrupt generation, set the serial I/O interrupt enable bit (SIOCON) to "1". 4. When you transmit data to the serial buffer, write data to SIODATA and set SIOCON.3 to 1, the shift operation starts. 5. When the shift operation (transmit/receive) is completed, the SIO pending bit (SIOCON.0) are set to "1" and SIO interrupt request is generated.
17-1
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
S3C825A/P825A
SIO CONTROL REGISTERS (SIOCON) The control register for serial I/O interface module, SIOCON, is located at E0H in set 1, bank 0. It has the control setting for SIO module. -- Clock source selection (internal or external) for shift clock -- Interrupt enable -- Edge selection for shift operation -- Clear 3-bit counter and start shift operation -- Shift operation (transmit) enable -- Mode selection (transmit/receive or receive-only) -- Data direction selection (MSB first or LSB first) A reset clears the SIOCON value to "00H". This configures the corresponding module with an internal clock source at the SCK, selects receive-only operating mode, and clears the 3-bit counter. The data shift operation and the interrupt are disabled. The selected data direction is MSB-first.
Serial I/O Module Control Register (SIOCON) E0H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
SIO shift clock selection bit: 0 = Internal clock (P.S Clock) 1 = External clock (SCK)
SIO interrupt pending bit: 0 = No interrupt pending 0 = Clear pending condition (when write) 1 = Interrupt is pending SIO interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable SIO interrupt 1 = Enable SIO interrupt SIO shift operation enable bit: 0 = Disable shifter and clock counter 1 = Enable shifter and clock counter SIO counter clear and shift start bit: 0 = No action 1 = Clear 3-bit counter and start shifting
Data direction control bit: 0 = MSB-first mode 1 = LSB-first mode SIO mode selection bit: 0 = Receive only mode 1 = Transmit/receive mode Shift clock edge selection bit: 0 = tX at falling edeges, rx at rising edges. 1 = tX at rising edeges, rx at falling edges.
Figure 17-1. Serial I/O Module Control Register (SIOCON)
17-2
S3C825A/P825A
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
SIO PRE-SCALER REGISTER (SIOPS) The prescaler register for serial I/O interface module, SIOPS, are located at E2H in set 1, bank 0. The value stored in the SIO pre-scale register, SIOPS, lets you determine the SIO clock rate (baud rate) as follows: Baud rate = Input clock (fxx/4)/(Prescaler value + 1), or SCK input clock.
SIO Pre-scaler Register (SIOPS) E2H, Set 1, Bank 0 R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Baud rate = (fXX/4)/(SIOPS + 1)
Figure 17-2. SIO Prescaler Register (SIOPS)
SIO BLOCK DIAGRAM
CLK
3-Bit Counter Clear
SIO INT SIOCON.0 Pending IRQ3
SIOCON.3 SIOCON.7 SIOCON.4 (Edge Select) SCK SIOPS (E2H, bank 0) fxx/2 8-bit P.S. 1/2 M U X CLK 8-Bit SIO Shift Buffer (SIODATA, E1H, bank 0) SIOCON.2 (Shift Enable)
SIOCON.1 (Interrupt Enable)
SIOCON.5 (Mode Select) SO SIOCON.6 (LSB/MSB First Mode Select)
8 SI
Data Bus
Figure 17-3. SIO Functional Block Diagram
17-3
SERIAL I/O INTERFACE
S3C825A/P825A
SERIAL I/O TIMING DIAGRAM (SIO)
SCK
SI
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
DI0
SO
DO7
DO6
DO5
DO4
DO3
DO2
DO1
DO0
IRQ3 Set SIOCON.3
Transmit Complete
Figure 17-4. Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at falling, SIOCON.4 = 0)
SCK
SI
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
DI0
SO
DO7
DO6
DO5
DO4
DO3
DO2
DO1
DO0
IRQ3 Set SIOCON.3
Transmit Complete
Figure 17-5. Serial I/O Timing in Transmit/Receive Mode (Tx at rising, SIOCON.4 = 1)
17-4
S3C825A/P825A
UART
18
OVERVIEW
UART
The UART block has a full-duplex serial port with programmable operating modes: There is one synchronous mode and three UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter) modes: -- Serial I/O with baud rate of fxx/(16 x (BRDATA+1)) -- 8-bit UART mode; variable baud rate -- 9-bit UART mode; fxx/16 -- 9-bit UART mode, variable baud rate UART receive and transmit buffers are both accessed via the data register, UDATA, is set 1, bank 0 at address F9H. Writing to the UART data register loads the transmit buffer; reading the UART data register accesses a physically separate receive buffer. When accessing a receive data buffer (shift register), reception of the next byte can begin before the previously received byte has been read from the receive register. However, if the first byte has not been read by the time the next byte has been completely received, one of the bytes will be lost. In all operating modes, transmission is started when any instruction (usually a write operation) uses the UDATA register as its destination address. In mode 0, serial data reception starts when the receive interrupt pending bit (INTPND.5) is "0" and the receive enable bit (UARTCON.4) is "1". In mode 1, 2, and 3, reception starts whenever an incoming start bit ("0") is received and the receive enable bit (UARTCON.4) is set to "1". PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE To program the UART modules, follow these basic steps: 1. Configure P5.4 and P5.5 to alternative function (RxD (P5.4), TxD (P5.5)) for UART module by setting the P5CONH register to appropriatly value. 2. Load an 8-bit value to the UARTCON control register to properly configure the UART I/O module. 3. For interrupt generation, set the UART I/O interrupt enable bit (UARTCON.1 or UARTCON.0) to "1". 4. When you transmit data to the UART buffer, write data to UDATA, the shift operation starts. 5. When the shift operation (transmit/receive) is completed, UART pending bit (INTPND.4 or INTPND.5) is set to "1" and an UART interrupt request is generated.
18-1
UART
S3C825A/P825A
UART CONTROL REGISTER (UARTCON) The control register for the UART is called UARTCON in set 1, bank 0 at address FAH. It has the following control functions: -- Operating mode and baud rate selection -- Multiprocessor communication and interrupt control -- Serial receive enable/disable control -- 9th data bit location for transmit and receive operations (modes 2 and 3 only) -- UART transmit and receive interrupt control A reset clears the UARTCON value to "00H". So, if you want to use UART module, you must write appropriate value to UARTCON.
UART Control Register (UARTCON) FAH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB MS1 MS0 MCE RE TB8 RB8 RIE TIE LSB
Operating mode and baud rate selection bits (see table below) Multiprocessor communication(1) enable bit (for modes 2 and 3 only): 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Serial data receive enable bit: 0 = Disable 1 = Enable
Transmit interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Received interrupt enable bit: 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Location of the 9th data bit that was received in UART mode 2 or 3 ("0" or "1")
Location of the 9th data bit to be transmitted in UART mode 2 or 3 ("0" or "1") MS1 MS0 Mode Description(2) Baud Rate 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 Shift register 8-bit UART 9-bit UART 9-bit UART fxx/(16 x (BRDATA + 1)) fxx/(16 x (BRDATA + 1)) fxx/16 fxx/(16 x (BRDATA + 1))
NOTES: 1. In mode 2 or 3, if the UARTCON.5 bit is set to "1" then the receive interrupt will not be activated if the received 9th data bit is "0". In mode 1, if UARTCON.5 = "1" then the receive interrut will not be activated if a valid stop bit was not received. In mode 0, the UARTCON.5 bit should be "0" 2. The descriptions for 8-bit and 9-bit UART mode do not include start and stop bits for serial data receive and transmit.
Figure 18-1. UART Control Register (UARTCON)
18-2
S3C825A/P825A
UART
UART INTERRUPT PENDING BITS The UART interrupt pending bits, INTPND.5-.4, are located in set 1, bank 0 at address D0H, it contains the UART data transmit interrupt pending bit (INTPND.4) and the receive interrupt pending bit (INTPND.5). In mode 0, the receive interrupt pending bit INTPND.5 is set to "1" when the 8th receive data bit has been shifted. In mode 1, 2, and 3, the INTPND.5 bit is set to "1" at the halfway point of the stop bit's shift time. When the CPU has acknowledged the receive interrupt pending condition, the INTPND.5 bit must then be cleared by software in the interrupt service routine. In mode 0, the transmit interrupt pending bit INTPND.4 is set to "1" when the 8th transmit data bit has been shifted. In mode 1, 2, or 3, the INTPND.4 bit is set at the start of the stop bit. When the CPU has acknowledged the transmit interrupt pending condition, the INTPND.4 bit must then be cleared by software in the interrupt service routine.
Interrupt Pending Register (INTPND) D0H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Not used
Timer 0 overflow interrupt pending bit Timer 0 match/capture interrupt pending bit Timer 3 overflow interrupt pending bit Timer 3 match/capture interrupt pending bit Tx interrupt pending bit (for UART) Rx interrupt pending bit (for UART): 0 = Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write "0". 1 = Interrupt request is pending
Figure 18-2. UART Interrupt Pending Bits (INTPND.5-.4)
18-3
UART
S3C825A/P825A
UART DATA REGISTER (UDATA)
UART Data Register (UDATA) F9H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Transmit or receive data
Figure 18-3. UART Data Register (UDATA)
UART BAUD RATE DATA REGISTER (BRDATA) The value stored in the UART baud rate register, BRDATA, lets you determine the UART clock rate (baud rate).
UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATA) FBH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W MSB .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .0 LSB
Baud rate data
Figure 18-4. UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATA) BAUD RATE CALCULATIONS Mode 0 Baud Rate Calculation In mode 0, the baud rate is determined by the UART baud rate data register, BRDATA in set 1, bank 0 at address FBH: Mode 0 baud rate = fxx/(16 x (BRDATA + 1)). Mode 2 Baud Rate Calculation The baud rate in mode 2 is fixed at the fOSC clock frequency divided by 16: Mode 2 baud rate = fxx/16 Modes 1 and 3 Baud Rate Calculation In modes 1 and 3, the baud rate is determined by the UART baud rate data register, BRDATA in set 1, bank 0 at address FBH: Mode 1 and 3 baud rate = fxx/(16 x ( BRDATA + 1))
18-4
S3C825A/P825A
UART
Table 18-1. Commonly Used Baud Rates Generated by BRDATA Mode Mode 2 Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 3 Baud Rate 0.5 MHz 38.461 Hz 19.230 Hz 9.615 Hz 4.808 Hz 19.230 Hz 9.615 Hz 4.808 Hz Oscillation Clock Decimal 8 MHz 8 MHz 8 MHz 8 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 4 MHz 4 MHz x 12 25 51 103 12 25 51 BRDATA Hexdecimal x 0CH 19H 33H 67H 0CH 19H 33H
18-5
UART
S3C825A/P825A
BLOCK DIAGRAM
SAM8 Internal Data Bus TB8 MS0 MS1 BRDATA S D Q CLK UARTDATA CLK Zero Detector MS0 MS1 RxD (P5.4)
fxx
Baud Rate Generator
Write to UDATA
Start
Shift
TxD (P5.5)
Tx Control
Tx Clock TIP
EN Send TxD (P5.5)
IRQ3 Interrupt
TIE RIE
Shift Clock
Rx Clock RE RIE Start 1-to-0 Transition Detector
RIP
Receive
Rx Control
Shift Shift Value
Bit Detector
MS0 MS1
Shift Register
UARTDATA RxD (P5.4) SAM8 Internal Data Bus
Figure 18-5. UART Functional Block Diagram
18-6
S3C825A/P825A
UART
UART MODE 0 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION In mode 0, UART is input and output through the RxD (P5.4) pin and TxD (P5.5) pin outputs the shift clock. Data is transmitted or received in 8-bit units only. The LSB of the 8-bit value is transmitted (or received) first. Mode 0 Transmit Procedure 1. Select mode 0 by setting UARTCON.6 and .7 to "00B". 2. Write transmission data to the shift register UDATA (F9H, set 1, bank 0) to start the transmission operation. Mode 0 Receive Procedure 1. Select mode 0 by setting UARTCON.6 and .7 to "00B". 2. Clear the receive interrupt pending bit (INTPND.5) by writing a "0" to INTPND.5. 3. Set the UART receive enable bit (UARTCON.4) to "1". 4. The shift clock will now be output to the TxD (P5.5) pin and will read the data at the RxD (P5.4) pin. A UART receive interrupt (IRQ3, vector D4H) occurs when UARTCON.1 is set to "1".
Write to Shift Register (UDATA)
Shift
RxD (Data Out)
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
TxD (Shift Clock)
TIP Write to UARTPND (Clear RIP and set RE)
RIP
RE Receive D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Shift
RxD (Data In)
TxD (Shift Clock)
Figure 18-6. Timing Diagram for Serial Port Mode 0 Operation
Transmit
18-7
UART
S3C825A/P825A
SERIAL PORT MODE 1 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION In mode 1, 10-bits are transmitted (through the TxD (P5.5) pin) or received (through the RxD (P5.4) pin). Each data frame has three components: -- Start bit ("0") -- 8 data bits (LSB first) -- Stop bit ("1") When receiving, the stop bit is written to the RB8 bit in the UARTCON register. The baud rate for mode 1 is variable. Mode 1 Transmit Procedure 1. Select the baud rate generated by BRDATA. 2. Select mode 1 (8-bit UART) by setting UARTCON bits 7 and 6 to '01B'. 3. Write transmission data to the shift register UDATA (F9H, set 1, bank 0). The start and stop bits are generated automatically by hardware. Mode 1 Receive Procedure 1. Select the baud rate to be generated by BRDATA. 2. Select mode 1 and set the RE (Receive Enable) bit in the UARTCON register to "1". 3. The start bit low ("0") condition at the RxD (P5.4) pin will cause the UART module to start the serial data receive operation.
Tx Clock Write to Shift Register (UDATA) Shift TxD TIP Start Bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Stop Bit
Rx Clock RxD D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Stop Bit
Start Bit
Bit Detect Sample Time Shift RIP Receive
Figure 18-7. Timing Diagram for Serial Port Mode 1 Operation
18-8
Transmit
S3C825A/P825A
UART
SERIAL PORT MODE 2 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION In mode 2, 11-bits are transmitted (through the TxD pin) or received (through the RxD pin). Each data frame has four components: -- Start bit ("0") -- 8 data bits (LSB first) -- Programmable 9th data bit -- Stop bit ("1") The 9th data bit to be transmitted can be assigned a value of "0" or "1" by writing the TB8 bit (UARTCON.3). When receiving, the 9th data bit that is received is written to the RB8 bit (UARTCON.2), while the stop bit is ignored. The baud rate for mode 2 is fosc/16 clock frequency. Mode 2 Transmit Procedure 1. Select mode 2 (9-bit UART) by setting UARTCON bits 6 and 7 to '10B'. Also, select the 9th data bit to be transmitted by writing TB8 to "0" or "1". 2. Write transmission data to the shift register, UDATA (F9H, set 1, bank 0), to start the transmit operation. Mode 2 Receive Procedure 1. Select mode 2 and set the receive enable bit (RE) in the UARTCON register to "1". 2. The receive operation starts when the signal at the RxD pin goes to low level.
Tx Clock Write to Shift Register (UARTDATA) Shift TxD TIP Start Bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 TB8 Stop Bit
Rx Clock RxD D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 RB8 Stop Bit
Start Bit
Bit Detect Sample Time Shift RIP Receive
Figure 18-8. Timing Diagram for Serial Port Mode 2 Operation
Transmit
18-9
UART
S3C825A/P825A
SERIAL PORT MODE 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION In mode 3, 11-bits are transmitted (through the TxD (P5.5) pin) or received (through the RxD (P5.4) pin). Mode 3 is identical to mode 2 except for baud rate, which is variable. Each data frame has four components: -- Start bit ("0") -- 8 data bits (LSB first) -- Programmable 9th data bit -- Stop bit ("1") Mode 3 Transmit Procedure 1. Select the baud rate generated by BRDATA. 2. Select mode 3 operation (9-bit UART) by setting UARTCON bits 6 and 7 to '11B'. Also, select the 9th data bit to be transmitted by writing UARTCON.3 (TB8) to "0" or "1". 3. Write transmission data to the shift register, UDATA (F9H, set 1, bank 0), to start the transmit operation. Mode 3 Receive Procedure 1. Select the baud rate to be generated by BRDATA. 2. Select mode 3 and set the RE (Receive Enable) bit in the UARTCON register to "1". 3. The receive operation will be started when the signal at the RxD (P5.4) pin goes to low level.
Tx Clock Write to Shift Register (UARTDATA) Shift TxD TIP Start Bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 TB8 Stop Bit
Rx Clock RxD D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 RB8 Stop Bit
Start Bit
Bit Detect Sample Time Shift RIP Receive
Figure 18-9. Timing Diagram for Serial Port Mode 3 Operation
18-10
Transmit
S3C825A/P825A
UART
SERIAL COMMUNICATION FOR MULTIPROCESSOR CONFIGURATIONS The S3C8-series multiprocessor communication features lets a "master" S3C825A send a multiple-frame serial message to a "slave" device in a multi-S3C825A configuration. It does this without interrupting other slave devices that may be on the same serial line. This feature can be used only in UART modes 2 or 3. In these modes 2 and 3, 9 data bits are received. The 9th bit value is written to RB8 (UARTCON.2). The data receive operation is concluded with a stop bit. You can program this function so that when the stop bit is received, the serial interrupt will be generated only if RB8 = "1". To enable this feature, you set the MCE bit in the UARTCON register. When the MCE bit is "1", serial data frames that are received with the 9th bit = "0" do not generate an interrupt. In this case, the 9th bit simply separates the address from the serial data. Sample Protocol for Master/Slave Interaction When the master device wants to transmit a block of data to one of several slaves on a serial line, it first sends out an address byte to identify the target slave. Note that in this case, an address byte differs from a data byte: In an address byte, the 9th bit is "1" and in a data byte, it is "0". The address byte interrupts all slaves so that each slave can examine the received byte and see if it is being addressed. The addressed slave then clears its MCE bit and prepares to receive incoming data bytes. The MCE bits of slaves that were not addressed remain set, and they continue operating normally while ignoring the incoming data bytes. While the MCE bit setting has no effect in mode 0, it can be used in mode 1 to check the validity of the stop bit. For mode 1 reception, if MCE is "1", the receive interrupt will be issue unless a valid stop bit is received.
18-11
UART
S3C825A/P825A
Setup Procedure for Multiprocessor Communications Follow these steps to configure multiprocessor communications: 1. Set all S3C825A devices (masters and slaves) to UART mode 2 or 3. 2. Write the MCE bit of all the slave devices to "1". 3. The master device's transmission protocol is: -- First byte: the address identifying the target slave device (9th bit = "1") -- Next bytes: data (9th bit = "0") 4. When the target slave receives the first byte, all of the slaves are interrupted because the 9th data bit is "1". The targeted slave compares the address byte to its own address and then clears its MCE bit in order to receive incoming data. The other slaves continue operating normally.
Full-Duplex Multi-S3C825A Interconnect
TxD RxD Master S3C825A
TxD RxD Slave 1 S3C825A
TxD RxD Slave 2 S3C825A
...
TxD RxD Slave n S3C825A
Figure 18-10. Connection Example for Multiprocessor Serial Data Communications
18-12
S3C825A/P825A
ELECTRICAL DATA
19
OVERVIEW
ELECTRICAL DATA
In this chapter, S3C825A electrical characteristics are presented in tables and graphs. The information is arranged in the following order: -- Absolute maximum ratings -- D.C. electrical characteristics -- A.C. electrical characteristics -- Input/output capacitance -- Oscillation characteristics -- Oscillation stabilization time -- Data retention supply voltage in stop mode -- Serial I/O timing characteristics -- A/D converter electrical characteristics
19-1
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C825A/P825A
Table 19-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA= 25 C) Parameter Supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage Output current high Symbol VDD VI VO IOH IOL TA TSTG Conditions - Ports 0-8 - One I/O pin active All I/O pins active Output current low One I/O pin active Total pin current for port Operating temperature Storage temperature Rating - 0.3 to +6.5 - 0.3 to VDD + 0.3 - 0.3 to VDD + 0.3 - 15 - 60 + 30 + 100 - 25 to + 85 - 65 to + 150
C
Unit V
mA
Table 19-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (TA = -25 C to + 85 C, VDD = 2.0 V to 5.5 V) Parameter Operating voltage Symbol VDD VIH1 VIH2 VIH3 Input low voltage VIL1 VIL2 VIL3 Output high voltage VOH Conditions fx = 0.4-4 MHz, 32.8 kHz fx = 0.4-8 MHz Input high voltage Ports 0-8 RESET XIN, XOUT, XTIN, XTOUT Ports 0-8 RESET XIN, XOUT, XTIN, XTOUT VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V All output ports; IOH = -1 mA VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V All output ports; IOL = 10 mA VDD - 1.0 - - - Min. 2.0 2.2 0.8 VDD 0.8 VDD VDD-0.1 - Typ. - - Max. 5.5 5.5 VDD VDD VDD 0.2 VDD 0.2 VDD 0.1 VDD Unit V
Output low voltage
VOL
-
-
2.0
19-2
S3C825A/P825A
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 19-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Continued) (TA = -25 C to + 85 C, VDD = 2.0 V to 5.5 V) Parameter Input high leakage current Symbol ILIH1 Conditions VIN = VDD All input pins except XIN, XOUT, XTIN, XTOUT VIN = VDD, XIN, XOUT, XTIN, XTOUT VIN = 0 V All input pins except RESET, XIN, XOUT, XTIN, XTOUT ILIL2 Output high leakage current Output low leakage current Pull-up resistor ILOH ILOL RL1 VIN = 0 V, XIN, XOUT, XTIN, XTOUT VOUT = VDD All output pins VOUT = 0 V All output pins VIN = 0 V Port 0-8 RL2 VIN = 0 V RESET Oscillator feed back resistors ROSC1 ROSC2 LCD voltage dividing resistor |VLCD - COMi| voltage drop (I = 0-7) |VLCD - SEGx| voltage drop (x = 0-31) Middle output voltage RLCD VDC VDD = 5 V VDD = 3 V VDD = 5 V VDD = 3 V - - 25 50 150 300 300 - - 50 100 250 500 750 -20 3 -3 100 150 400 700 1500 k k - - Min. - Typ. - Max. 3 Unit uA
ILIH2 Input low leakage current ILIL1
20 -3
VDD = 5 V, TA = 25 C XIN = VDD, XOUT = 0 V VDD = 5 V, TA = 25 C XTIN = VDD, XTOUT = 0 V TA = 25 C VDD = 2.7 V to 5.5 V - 15 A per common pin VDD = 2.7 V to 5.5 V - 15 A per common pin VDD = 2.7 V to 5.5 V LCD clock = 0 Hz VLC1 = VDD
1500
3000
4500
40 -
60 -
80 120
k mV
VDS
-
-
120
mV
VLC2 VLC3 VLC4 VLC5
0.8VDD-0.2 0.6VDD-0.2 0.4VDD-0.2 0.2VDD-0.2
0.8VDD 0.6VDD 0.4VDD 0.2VDD
0.8VDD+0.2 0.6VDD+0.2 0.4VDD+0.2 0.2VDD+0.2
V
19-3
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C825A/P825A
Table 19-2. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Concluded) (TA = -25 C to + 85 C, VDD = 2.0 V to 5.5 V) Parameter Supply Current (1) Symbol IDD1 Conditions Run mode : VDD = 5 V 10% Crystal oscillator C1 = C2 = 22pF VDD = 3 V 10% IDD2 Idle mode : VDD = 5 V 10% Crystal oscillator C1 = C2 = 22pF VDD = 3 V 10% IDD3 IDD4 IDD5 6.0 MHz Min - Typ 4.0 Max 9.0 Units mA
4.19 MHz 6.0 MHz 4.19 MHz 6.0 MHz
3.0 2.0 1.5 1.0
6.0 4.0 3.4 2.5
4.19 MHz 6.0 MHz 4.19 MHz
0.9 0.6 0.4 15 6 0.5
2.0 1.2 0.8 30 15 3 uA
Run mode : VDD = 3 V 10% 32kHz Crystal oscillator Idle mode : VDD = 3 V 10% 32kHz Crystal oscillator Stop mode : VDD = 5 V 10% TA = 25 C Stop mode : VDD = 3 V 10% TA = 25 C
0.3
2
NOTES: 1. Supply current does not include current drawn through internal pull-up resistors, LCD voltage dividing resistors, and ADC. 2. IDD1 and IDD2 include power consumption for subsystem clock oscillation. 3. IDD3 and IDD4 are current when main system clock oscillation stops and the subsystem clock is used. 4. IDD5 is current when main system clock and subsystem clock oscillation stops. 5. Every values in this table is measured when bits 4-3 of the system clock control register (CLKCON.4-.3) is set to "11B".
19-4
S3C825A/P825A
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 19-3. A.C. Electrical Characteristics (TA = -25 C to +85 C, VDD = 2.0 V to 5.5 V) Parameter Interrupt input high, low width (P2.4-P2.7, P4.0-P4.7) RESET input low width Symbol tINTH, tINTL tRSL Conditions VDD = 5 V Min 200 Typ - Max Unit ns
VDD = 5 V
10
-
-
us
tTIL
tTIH
0.8 VDD 0.2 VDD 0.2 VDD
Figure 19-1. Input Timing for External Interrupts (P2.4-P2.7, P4)
tRSL
RESET
0.2 V DD
Figure 19-2. Input Timing for RESET
19-5
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C825A/P825A
Table 19-4. Input/Output Capacitance (TA = -25 C to +85 C, VDD = 0 V ) Parameter Input capacitance Output capacitance I/O capacitance Symbol CIN COUT CIO Conditions f = 1 MHz; unmeasured pins are returned to VSS Min - Typ - Max 10 Unit pF
Table 19-5. Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode (TA = -25 C to + 85 C) Parameter Data retention supply voltage Data retention supply current Symbol VDDDR IDDDR VDDDR = 2 V (TA = 25 C) Stop mode Conditions Min 2.0 - Typ - - Max 5.5 1 Unit V uA
RESET Occurs
Stop Mode Data Retention Mode
Oscillation Stabilization Time Normal Operating Mode
~ ~ ~ ~
VDD
VDDDR Execution of STOP Instrction RESET 0.2 VDD NOTE: tWAIT is the same as 4096 x 16 x 1/fxx tWAIT
Figure 19-3. Stop Mode Release Timing Initiated by RESET
19-6
S3C825A/P825A
ELECTRICAL DATA
Oscillation Stabilization Time Stop Mode Data Retention Mode Idle Mode
~ ~ ~ ~
VDD
VDDDR Execution of STOP Instruction Interrupt 0.2 VDD tWAIT
Normal Operating Mode
NOTE:
tWAIT is the same as 16 x 1/BT clock
Figure 19-4. Stop Mode Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts
19-7
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C825A/P825A
Table 19-6. A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics (TA = -25 C to +85 C, VDD = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Parameter Resolution Total Accuracy Integral Linearity Error Differential Linearity Error Offset Error of Top Offset Error of Bottom Conversion Time
(1)
Symbol
Conditions
Min - -
Typ 10 - - - 1 1 - - 1000 - - -
Max - 3 2 1 3 3 - AVREF - VDD VSS + 0.3 10 3 1.5 500
Unit bit LSB
ILE DLE EOT EOB TCON VIAN RAN AVREF AVSS IADIN IADC
VDD = 5.12 V AVREF = 5.12 V AVSS = 0 V CPU clock = 8 MHz 10-bit resolution 50 x fxx/4, fxx = 8 MHz - - - - AVREF = VDD = 5V AVREF = VDD = 5V AVREF = VDD = 3V AVREF = VDD = 5V When power down mode
- - - - 25 AVSS 2 2.7 VSS
S V M V
Analog Input Voltage Analog Input Impedance Analog Reference Voltage Analog Ground Analog Input Current Analog Block Current (2)
A mA
-
1 0.5 100
nA
NOTES: 1. `Conversion time' is the time required from the moment a conversion operation starts until it ends. 2. IADC is an operating current of A/D converter.
19-8
S3C825A/P825A
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 19-7. Synchronous SIO Electrical Characteristics (TA = -25 C to +85 C, VDD = 2.0 V to 5.5 V) Parameter SCK cycle time Symbol tCKY tKH, tKL Conditions External SCK source Internal SCK source SCK high, low width External SCK source Internal SCK source SI setup time to SCK high SI hold time to SCK high Output delay for SCK to SO tKSO tKSI tSIK External SCK source Internal SCK source External SCK source Internal SCK source External SCK source Internal SCK source Min 1000 1000 500 tKCY/2- 50 250 250 400 400 - - 300 250 - - - - - - Typ - Max - Unit ns
tCKY tKL SCK 0.8 VDD 0.2 VDD tSIK tKSI 0.8 VDD Input Data 0.2 VDD tKH
SI
tKSO SO Output Data
Figure 19-5. Serial Data Transfer Timing
19-9
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C825A/P825A
Table 19-8. Main Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -25 C to + 85 C) Oscillator Crystal Clock Circuit
C1 XIN
Parameter Main oscillation frequency
Condition (VDD) 2.2 V - 5.5 V
Min 0.4
Typ -
Max 8
Unit MHz
XOUT C2
2.0 V - 5.5 V Ceramic
C1 XIN
0.4 0.4
- -
4 8
Main oscillation frequency
2.2 V - 5.5 V
XOUT C2
2.0 V - 5.5 V External clock
XIN
0.4 0.4
- -
4 8
XIN input frequency
2.2 V - 5.5 V
XOUT
2.0 V - 5.5 V RC
XIN R XOUT
0.4 0.4
- -
4 2 MHz
Frequency
5.0 V
Frequency
3.0 V
0.4
-
1
Table 19-9. Sub Oscillator Characteristics (TA = - 25 C to + 85 C) Oscillator Crystal Clock Circuit
C1 XTIN
Parameter Sub oscillation frequency
Condition (VDD) 2.0 V-5.5 V
Min 32
Typ 32.768
Max 35
Unit kHz
XTOUT C2
External clock
XTIN
XTIN input frequency
2.0 V-5.5 V
32
-
100
kHz
XTOUT
19-10
S3C825A/P825A
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 19-10. Main Oscillator Stabilization Time (TA = -25 C to + 85 C, VDD = 2.0 V to 5.5 V) Oscillator Crystal Ceramic External clock fx > 400 kHz Oscillation stabilization occurs when VDD is equal to the minimum oscillator voltage range. XIN input high and low level width (tXH, tXL) Test Condition Min - - 62.5 Typ - - - Max 40 10 1250 Unit ms ms ns
1/fx tXL XIN VDD-0.1V 0.1V tXH
Figure 19-6. Clock Timing Measurement at XIN
Table 19-11. Sub Oscillator Stabilization Time (TA = -25 C to + 85 C, VDD = 2.0 V to 5.5 V) Oscillator Crystal External clock Test Condition - XTIN input high and low level width (tXTL, tXTH) Min - 5 Typ - - Max 10 15 Unit s s
1/fxt tXTL XTIN VDD-0.1V 0.1V tXTH
Figure 19-7. Clock Timing Measurement at XTIN
19-11
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C825A/P825A
Instruction Clock 2.0 MHZ
Main Oscillator Frequency 8.0 MHZ
4.0 MHZ
8.19 kHz 1 2 2.2 Supply Voltage (V) CPU Clock = 1/4n x oscillator frequency (n = 1,2,8,16) 3 4 5 6 7
400 kHz
Figure 19-8. Operating Voltage Range
19-12
S3C825A/P825A
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 19- 12. UART Timing Characteristics in Mode 0 (8 MHz) (TA = - 25C to + 85C, VDD = 2.0 V to 5.5 V, Load capacitance = 80 pF) Parameter Serial port clock cycle time Output data setup to clock rising edge Clock rising edge to input data valid Output data hold after clock rising edge Input data hold after clock rising edge Serial port clock High, Low level width Symbol tSCK tS1 tS2 tH1 tH2 tHIGH, tLOW Min 625 300 - tCPU - 50 0 250 Typ tCPU x 6 tCPU x 5 - tCPU - tCPU x 3 Max 875 - 300 - - 500 Unit ns
NOTES: 1. All timings are in nanoseconds (ns) and assume a 10-MHz CPU clock frequency. 2. The unit tCPU means one CPU clock period.
tSCK tHIGH tLOW
0.8 VDD 0.2 VDD
Figure 19-9. Waveform for UART Timing Characteristics
19-13
S3C825A/P825A
tSCK Shift Clock tH1 tS1 Data Out
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
D6
D7
tS2 Data In
VALID VALID
tH2
VALID VALID VALID VALID
VALID
VALID
NOTE: The symbols shown in this diagram are defined as follows: fSCK tS1 tS2 tH1 tH2 Serial port clock cycle time Output data setup to clock rising edge Clock rising edge to input data valid Output data hold after clock rising edge Input data hold after clock rising edge
ELECTRICAL DATA
Figure 19-10. A.C. Timing Waveform for the UART Module
19-14
S3C825A/P825A
MECHANICAL DATA
20
OVERVIEW
MECHANICAL DATA
The S3C825A microcontroller is currently available in 80-pin QFP and TQFP package.
23.90 0.30 20.00 0.20 0-8
+ 0.10
0.15 - 0.05
17.90 0.30
14.00 0.20
80-QFP-1420C
0.80 0.20 #1 0.80 0.35 + 0.10 0.15 MAX
0.10 MAX
#80
0.05 MIN (0.80) 2.65 0.10 3.00 MAX
0.80 0.20
NOTE: Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 20-1. Package Dimensions (80-QFP-1420C)
20-1
MECHANICAL DATA
S3C825A/P825A
14.00 BSC 12.00 BSC 0-7 0.09-0.20
14.00 BSC
12.00 BSC
80-TQFP-1212
#80
#1 0.50
0.17-0.27 0.08 MAX M 0.05-0.15 (1.25) 1.00 0.05 1.20 MAX
NOTE: Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 20-2. Package Dimension (80-TQFP-1212)
20-2
0.60 0.15
S3C825A/P825A
S3P825A OTP
21
OVERVIEW
S3P825A OTP
The S3P825A single-chip CMOS microcontroller is the OTP (One Time Programmable) version of the S3C825A microcontroller. It has an on-chip OTP ROM instead of a masked ROM. The EPROM is accessed by serial data format. The S3P825A is fully compatible with the S3C825A, both in function in D.C. electrical characteristics and in pin configuration. Because of its simple programming requirements, the S3P825A is ideal as an evaluation chip for the S3C825A.
21-1
S3P825A OTP
S3C825A/P825A
P1.1/SEG25 P1.2/SEG26 P1.3/SEG27 P1.4/SEG28 P1.5/SEG29 P1.6/SEG30 P1.7/SEG31 SDAT/P2.0 SCLK/P2.1 VDD/VDD1 VSS/VSS1 XOUT XIN VPP/TEST XTIN XTOUT RESET/RESET RESET P2.2/T2CLK P2.3/T2OUT P2.4/INT0/T0CLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P1.0/SEG24 P0.7/SEG23 P0.6/SEG22 P0.5/SEG21 P0.4/SEG20 P0.3/SEG19 P0.2/SEG18 P0.1/SEG17 P0.0/SEG16 P8.3/SEG15 P8.2/SEG14 P8.1/SEG13 P8.0/SEG12 P7.7/SEG11 P7.6/SEG10 P7.5/SEG9 P7.4/SEG8 P7.3/SEG7 P7.2/SEG6 P7.1/SEG5
S3P825A
(80-TQFP-1212)
P7.0/SEG4 P6.7/SEG3/COM7 P6.6/SEG2/COM6 P6.5/SEG1/COM5 P6.4/SEG0/COM4 P6.3/COM3 P6.2/COM2 P6.1/COM1 P6.0/COM0 VDD2 VSS2 VLC1 P5.6 P5.5/TXD P5.4/RXD P5.3/BUZ P5.2/SO P5.1/SI P5.0/SCK P4.7/INT11
Figure 21-1. S3P825A Pin Assignments (80-Pin TQFP Package)
21-2
P2.5/INT1/T1CLK P2.6/INT2/TAOUT P2.7/INT3/TBOUT AVREF P3.0/AD0 P3.1/AD1 P3.2/AD2 P3.3/AD3 AVSS P3.4 P3.5/T3CLK P3.6/T3OUT/T3PWM/T3CAP P3.7/T0OUT/T0PWM/T0CAP P4.0/INT4 P4.1/INT5 P4.2/INT6 P4.3/INT7 P4.4/INT8 P4.5/INT9 P4.6/INT10
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
S3C825A/P825A
S3P825A OTP
P0.7/SEG23 P1.0/SEG24 P1.1/SEG25 P1.2/SEG26 P1.3/SEG27 P1.4/SEG28 P1.5/SEG29 P1.6/SEG30 P1.7/SEG31 SDAT/P2.0 SCLK/P2.1 VDD/VDD1 VSS/VSS1 XOUT XIN VPP/TEST XTIN XTOUT RESET/RESET RESET P2.2/T2CLK P2.3/T2OUT P2.4/INT0/T0CLK P2.5/INT1/T1CLK P2.6/INT2/TAOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P0.6/SEG22 P0.5/SEG21 P0.4/SEG20 P0.3/SEG19 P0.2/SEG18 P0.1/SEG17 P0.0/SEG16 P8.3/SEG15 P8.2/SEG14 P8.1/SEG13 P8.0/SEG12 P7.7/SEG11 P7.6/SEG10 P7.5/SEG9 P7.4/SEG8 P7.3/SEG7
S3P825A
(80-QFP-1420C)
P7.2/SEG6 P7.1/SEG5 P7.0/SEG4 P6.7/SEG3/COM7 P6.6/SEG2/COM6 P6.5/SEG1/COM5 P6.4/SEG0/COM4 P6.3/COM3 P6.2/COM2 P6.1/COM1 P6.0/COM0 VDD2 VSS2 VLC1 P5.6 P5.5/TXD P5.4/RXD P5.3/BUZ P5.2/SO P5.1/SI P5.0/SCK P4.7/INT11 P4.6/INT10 P4.5/INT9
Figure 21-2. S3P825A Pin Assignments (80-Pin QFP Package)
P2.7/INT3/TBOUT AVREF P3.0/AD0 P3.1/AD1 P3.2/AD2 P3.3/AD3 AVSS P3.4 P3.5/T3CLK P3.6/T3OUT/T3PWM/T3CAP P3.7/T0OUT/T0PWM/T0CAP P4.0/INT4 P4.1/INT5 P4.2/INT6 P4.3/INT7 P4.4/INT8
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
21-3
S3P825A OTP
S3C825A/P825A
Table 21-1. Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the EPROM Main Chip Pin Name P2.0 Pin Name SDAT Pin No. 8(10) During Programming I/O I/O Function Serial data pin. Output port when reading and input port when writing. Can be assigned as a Input/push-pull output port. Serial clock pin. Input only pin. Power supply pin for EPROM cell writing (indicates that OTP enters into the writing mode). When 12.5 V is applied, OTP is in writing mode and when 5 V is applied, OTP is in reading mode. (Option) Chip Initialization Logic power supply pin. VDD should be tied to +5 V during programming.
P2.1 TEST
SCLK VPP
9(11) 14(16)
I I
RESET VDD1/VSS1
RESET VDD/VSS
17(19) 10/11(12/13)
I -
NOTE: Parentheses indicate pin for 80-pin-QFP-1420 package.
Table 21-2. Comparison of S3P825A and S3C825A Features Characteristic Program Memory Operating Voltage (VDD) OTP Programming Mode Pin Configuration EPROM Programmability 2.0 V to 5.5 V VDD = 5 V, VPP (TEST) = 12.5 V 80 TQFP, 80 QFP User Program 1 time 80 TQFP, 80 QFP Programmed at the factory S3P825A 48-Kbyte EPROM S3C825A 48-Kbyte mask ROM 2.0 V to 5.5 V
OPERATING MODE CHARACTERISTICS When 12.5 V is supplied to the VPP (TEST) pin of the S3P825A, the EPROM programming mode is entered. The operating mode (read, write, or read protection) is selected according to the input signals to the pins listed in Table 21-3 below. Table 21-3. Operating Mode Selection Criteria VDD 5V VPP (TEST) 5V 12.5 V 12.5 V 12.5 V REG/MEM MEM 0 0 0 1 Address(A15-A0) 0000H 0000H 0000H 0E3FH R/W 1 0 1 0 Mode EPROM read EPROM program EPROM verify EPROM read protection
NOTE: "0" means Low level; "1" means High level.
21-4
S3C825A/P825A
S3P825A OTP
Instruction Clock 2.0 MHZ
Main Oscillator Frequency 8.0 MHZ
4.0 MHZ
8.19 kHz 1 2 2.2 Supply Voltage (V) CPU Clock = 1/4n x oscillator frequency (n = 1,2,8,16) 3 4 5 6 7
400 kHz
Figure 21-3. Operating Voltage Range
21-5
S3P825A OTP
S3C825A/P825A
NOTES
21-6
S3C825A/P825A
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
22
OVERVIEW
SHINE
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
Samsung provides a powerful and easy-to-use development support system in turnkey form. The development support system is configured with a host system, debugging tools, and support software. For the host system, any standard computer that operates with MS-DOS as its operating system can be used. One type of debugging tool including hardware and software is provided: the sophisticated and powerful in-circuit emulator, SMDS2+, for S3C7, S3C6, S3C8 families of microcontrollers. The SMDS2+ is a new and improved version of SMDS2. Samsung also offers support software that includes debugger, assembler, and a program for setting options.
Samsung Host Interface for In-Circuit Emulator, SHINE, is a multi-window based debugger for SMDS2+. SHINE provides pull-down and pop-up menus, mouse support, function/hot keys, and context-sensitive hyper-linked help. It has an advanced, multiple-windowed user interface that emphasizes ease of use. Each window can be sized, moved, scrolled, highlighted, added, or removed completely. SAMA ASSEMBLER The Samsung Arrangeable Microcontroller (SAM) Assembler, SAMA, is a universal assembler, and generates object code in standard hexadecimal format. Assembled program code includes the object code that is used for ROM data and required SMDS program control data. To assemble programs, SAMA requires a source file and an auxiliary definition (DEF) file with device specific information. SASM88 The SASM88 is a relocatable assembler for Samsung's S3C8-series microcontrollers. The SASM88 takes a source file containing assembly language statements and translates into a corresponding source code, object code and comments. The SASM88 supports macros and conditional assembly. It runs on the MS-DOS operating system. It produces the relocatable object code only, so the user should link object file. Object files can be linked with other object files and loaded into memory. HEX2ROM HEX2ROM file generates ROM code from HEX file which has been produced by assembler. ROM code must be needed to fabricate a microcontroller which has a mask ROM. When generating the ROM code (.OBJ file) by HEX2ROM, the value "FF" is filled into the unused ROM area up to the maximum ROM size of the target device automatically. TARGET BOARDS Target boards are available for all S3C8-series microcontrollers. All required target system cables and adapters are included with the device-specific target board.
22-1
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
S3C825A/P825A
IBM-PC AT or Compatible
RS-232C
SMDS2+
PROM/OTP Writer Unit
Target Application System
RAM Break/Display Unit Probe Adapter
Bus
Trace/Timer Unit
SAM8 Base Unit
POD
TB825A Target Board Eva Chip
Power Supply Unit
Figure 22-1. SMDS Product Configuration (SMDS2+)
22-2
S3C825A/P825A
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
TB825A TARGET BOARD The TB825A target board is used for the S3C825A microcontroller. It is supported with the SMDS2+.
TB825A
To User_VCC Off RESET 7411 Y1 (Sub-Clock) J101 25 100-Pin Connector 41 160 144 QFP S3E8210 EVA Chip 80 81 120 R6 RLCD SMDS2 SMDS2+ SM1345A 121 40 1 1 40-Pin Connector 2 1 40-Pin Connector 40 39 40 J102 2 On Idle Stop VCC 39 GND
+
+
1
Figure 22-2. TB825A Target Board Configuration
22-3
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
S3C825A/P825A
Table 22-1. Power Selection Settings for TB825A "To User_VCC" Settings
To User_VCC Off On TB825A VCC VSS VCC SMDS2/SMDS2+ To User_VCC Off On TB825A Target System
Operating Mode
Comments The SMDS2/SMDS2+ supplies VCC to the target board (evaluation chip) and the target system.
External VCC VSS
Target System
The SMDS2/SMDS2+ supplies VCC only to the target board (evaluation chip). The target system must have its own power supply.
VCC SMDS2/SMDS2+ NOTE: The following symbol in the "To User_Vcc" Setting column indicates the electrical short (off) configuration:
SMDS2+ Selection (SAM8) In order to write data into program memory that is available in SMDS2+, the target board should be selected to be for SMDS2+ through a switch as follows. Otherwise, the program memory writing function is not available. Table 22-2. The SMDS2+ Tool Selection Setting "SW1" Setting
SMDS2 SMDS2+
Operating Mode
R/W SMDS2+ R/W Target Board
IDLE LED The Yellow LED is ON when the evaluation chip (S3E8250) is in idle mode. STOP LED The Red LED is ON when the evaluation chip (S3E8250) is in stop mode.
22-4
S3C825A/P825A
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
J101 P1.1/SEG25 P1.3/SEG27 P1.5/SEG29 P1.7/SEG31 P2.1 VSS1 XIN XTIN RESET P2.3/T2OUT P2.5/INT1/T1CLK P2.7/INT3/TBOUT P3.0/AD0 P3.2/AD2 AVSS P3.5/T3CLK P3.7/T0OUT/T0PWM/T0CAP P4.1/INT5 P4.3/INT7 P4.5/INT9 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 P1.2/SEG26 P1.4/SEG28 P1.6/SEG30 P2.0 VDD1 XOUT TEST XTOUT P2.2/T2CLK P2.4/INT0/T0CLK P2.6/INT2/TAOUT AVREF P3.1/AD1 P3.3/AD3 P3.4 P3.6/T3OUT/T3PWM/T3CAP P4.0/INT4 P4.2/INT6 P4.4/INT8 P4.6/INT10
J102 P4.7/INT11 P5.1/SI P5.3/BUZ P5.5/TXD VLC1 VDD2 P6.1/COM1 P6.3/COM3 P6.5/SEG1/COM5 P6.7/SEG3/COM7 P7.1/SEG5 P7.3/SEG7 P7.5/SEG9 P7.7/SEG11 P8.1/SEG13 P8.3/SEG15 P0.1/SEG17 P0.3/SEG19 P0.5/SEG21 P0.7/SEG23 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 P5.0/SCK P5.2/SO P5.4/RXD P5.6 VSS2 P6.0/COM0 P6.2/COM2 P6.4/SEG0/COM4 P6.6/SEG2/COM6 P7.0/SEG4 P7.2/SEG6 P7.4/SEG8 P7.6/SEG10 P8.0/SEG12 P8.2/SEG14 P0.0/SEG16 P0.2/SEG18 P0.4/SEG20 P0.6/SEG22 P1.0/SEG24
Figure 22-3. 40-Pin Connectors (J101, J102) for TB825A
40-Pin DIP Connector 40-Pin DIP Connector
22-5
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
S3C825A/P825A
Target Board J101 40-Pin DIP Connector 1 2 J102 41 42 Target Cable for 40-Pin Connector Part Name: AS40D-A Order Code: SM6306 39 40 79 80
Target System J102 41 42 J101 40-Pin DIP Connectors 1 2
79
80
39
40
Figure 22-4. S3C825A Cables for 80-TQFP Package
22-6


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of S3P825

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  
[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]
 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X